2016 Jeep Grand Cherokee Owner`s Manual

2016 Jeep Grand Cherokee Owner`s Manual
2016 Grand Cherokee
STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS®
16WK741-126-AC
©2016 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
2016
OWNER’S MANUAL
Third Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
Grand Cherokee
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA
US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated nondrinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Copyright © 2016 FCA US LLC
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727
10
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .8
䡵 ROLLOVER WARNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .9
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
1
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC
vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials
that are traditional to our vehicles.
particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle
handles on different road surfaces. Your driving skills
will improve with experience. When driving off-road or
working the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect
the vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics.
Always observe federal, state, provincial and local laws
wherever you drive.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and
perform tasks that conventional passenger cars are not
intended. It handles and maneuvers differently from
many passenger cars both on-road and off-road, so take As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this
vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a
time to become familiar with your vehicle.
collision. Refer to “On-Road/Off-Road Driving Tips” in
The two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed “Starting And Operating” for further information.
for on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assisdriving or use in other severe conditions suited for a
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
four-wheel drive vehicle.
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Owner’s It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls, customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
INTRODUCTION 5
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc- ROLLOVER WARNING
tions and recommendations in this manual will help Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- many passenger vehicles. It is capable of performing
better in a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized Because of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is
dealer knows your Jeep® vehicle best, has factory-trained out of control it may roll over while some other vehicles
technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about may not.
your satisfaction.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other
unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle
control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result
in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal
injury. Drive carefully.
1
6 INTRODUCTION
two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more likely to die than a person
wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
Rollover Warning Label
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the Consult the following table for a description of the
U.S. government notes that the universal use of existing symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or this Owner’s Manual:
more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by
INTRODUCTION 7
1
8 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against
operating procedures that could result in a collision,
bodily injury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS
against procedures that could result in damage to your
vehicle. If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual,
you may miss important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
vehicle. Save this label for a convenient record of your
vehicle identification number and optional equipment.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on a
plate located on the left front corner of the instrument
panel pad, visible from outside of the vehicle through the
windshield. This number also is stamped into the right
front body, behind the right front seat. Move the right
front seat forward to allow better viewing of the stamped
VIN. This number also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your
VIN Location
INTRODUCTION 9
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
Right Front Body VIN Location
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
1
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Keyless Push Button Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ RKE Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Ignition Or Accessory On Message . . . . . . . . . .16
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
▫ Security System Manual Override . . . . .
䡵 SENTRY KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ Tamper Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Replacement RKE Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED
▫ Customer RKE Key Fob Programming . . . . . . .20
䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) . . . . .
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate . . . .
. . . . . .20
. . . . . .20
. . . . . .21
. . . . . .21
. . . . . .22
. . . . . .23
. . . . . .23
. . . . . .23
. . . . . .24
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ To Lock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . .25
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
▫ Programming Additional RKE Key Fobs . . . . . .26
▫ RKE Key Fob Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . .26
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
▫ Remote Start Abort Message On Driver
Information Display (DID) — If Equipped . . . .31
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive
The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
▫ Comfort Systems — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . .33
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
䡵 KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — PASSIVE ENTRY . . . .39
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
▫ To Enter Remote Start Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 䡵 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving
The Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
䡵 LIFTGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . .111
▫ Power Liftgate — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . .53
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
▫ Important Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
▫ Seat Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . . . . .70
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
2
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Put the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of
the RKE Key Fob against the keyless ignition push button
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
and push to operate the ignition.
includes a RKE Key Fob and a Keyless Push Button
Ignition.
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Keyless Push Button Ignition
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition with
the push of a button, as long as the RKE Key Fob is in the
passenger compartment.
The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four operating
positions; three of which are labeled and will illuminate
when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START, during start
RUN will illuminate.
NOTE: In case the ignition position does not change
with the push of a button, the RKE Key Fob may have a
low or dead battery. In this situation, a back up method
can be used to operate the keyless push button ignition.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
RKE Key Fob
The RKE Key Fob contains an emergency key, which
stores in the rear of the RKE Key Fob.
2
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the RKE Key Fob go
dead. The emergency key is also for locking the glove
box. You can keep the emergency key with you when
valet parking.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
at the top of the RKE Key Fob sideways with your thumb •
and then pull the key out with your other hand.
•
RKE Key Fob With Emergency Key
— Unlock Doors
— Lock Doors
•
— Remote Start — If Equipped
•
— Unlock Liftgate
•
— Panic Alarm
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Ignition Or Accessory On Message
When opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in
ACC or ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to
remind you to cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to the
chime, the ignition or accessory on message will display
in the cluster.
NOTE: With the Uconnect system, the power window
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power
outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition is placed in the OFF position. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature. The time for this
feature is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the transmission into PARK, apply the parking brake, turn the
engine OFF, remove the RKE Key Fob from the
ignition and lock your vehicle. If equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go, always make sure the keyless
ignition node is in “OFF” mode, remove the RKE
Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
WARNING! (Continued)
General Information
• Do not leave the RKE Key Fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and
do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
CAUTION!
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always remove
the RKE Key Fobs from vehicle, place the ignition in
the OFF position and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
2
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses a RKE Key Fob, an Ignition Node
Module, Keyless Push Button Ignition and a RF receiver
to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore,
only RKE Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The system
will not allow the engine to crank if an invalid RKE Key
Fob is used to start and operate the vehicle. The system
will shut the engine off in two seconds if an invalid RKE
Key Fob is used to start the engine.
NOTE: A RKE Key Fob that has not been programmed is
also considered an invalid key.
During normal operation, after placing the keyless ignition in the ON/RUN position, the Vehicle Security Light
will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check. If the light
remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is
a problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light
begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that
someone used an invalid RKE Key Fob to try to start the
engine. Either of these conditions will result in the engine
being shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10
seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon
as possible by an authorized dealer.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible with some aftermarket remote starting systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.
• Always remove the RKE Key Fobs from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in
the OFF position.
All of the RKE Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle
have been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
NOTE: Duplication of RKE Key Fobs may be performed
at an authorized dealer. This procedure consists of proNOTE: Only RKE Key Fobs that are programmed to the gramming a blank RKE Key Fob to the vehicle electronvehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the ics. A blank RKE Key Fob is one that has never been
vehicle. Once a RKE Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, programmed.
it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized
dealer.
Replacement RKE Key Fobs
2
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Customer RKE Key Fob Programming
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
Programming RKE Key Fobs may be performed at an The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors
authorized dealer.
for unauthorized entry and the Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Ignition for unauthorized operation. While the Vehicle
General Information
Security Alarm is armed, interior switches for door locks
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio and liftgate release are disabled. If something triggers the
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
alarm, the Vehicle Security Alarm will provide the folThis device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and lowing audible and visible signals: the horn will pulse,
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). the park lamps and/or turn signals will flash, and the
Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
Rearming Of The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
2. This device must accept any interference received,
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn
including interference that may cause undesired opoff after 29 seconds, 5 seconds between cycles, up to 8
eration.
cycles if the trigger remains active and then the Vehicle
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved Security Alarm will rearm itself.
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicles ignition is cycled to the “OFF”
position (refer to ⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting
And Operating⬙ for further information).
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry, make sure the vehicles keyless ignition system is OFF.
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
— Passive Entry, make sure the vehicle ignition
system is OFF, and the key is physically removed
from the ignition.
• Push the LOCK
button on the exterior Passive
Entry Door Handle with a valid RKE Key Fob
available in the same exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry⬙ in ⬙Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further
information).
• Push the LOCK
button on the RKE Key Fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
To Disarm The System
The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
button on the RKE Key Fob.
• Push the UNLOCK
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle (if
vehicle:
equipped, refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive
button on the interior power door
• Push LOCK
Entry⬙ in ⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your Velock switch with the driver and/or passenger
hicle⬙
for further information).
door open.
2
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
position.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry, push the keyless ignition button (requires at least one valid RKE Key Fob in the vehicle).
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
— Passive Entry, insert a valid key into the ignition
and turn the key to the ON position.
NOTE:
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously described arming sequences has occurred, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the liftgate button
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
on the RKE Key Fob cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
Security Alarm.
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
• The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this
power liftgate entry. Pushing the liftgate button will occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone
Security System Manual Override
enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the
door, the alarm will sound.
doors using the manual door lock plunger.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
Tamper Alert
NOTE:
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in • The front courtesy overhead console and door couryour absence, the horn will sound three times and the
tesy lights will turn on if the dimmer control is in the
exterior lights will blink three times when you disarm the
“Dome ON” position (extreme top position).
Vehicle Security Alarm. Check the vehicle for tampering.
• The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position
ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED
(extreme bottom position).
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the RKE
Key Fob to unlock the doors or after opening any door. REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the The RKE system allows you to lock
or unlock
the
outside mirrors (if equipped).
doors, open the power liftgate, remote start your
Alarm from
vehicle (if equipped), or activate the
The courtesy lights will fade to off after approximately 30
distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a
seconds, or they will immediately fade to off once the
hand-held RKE Key Fob. The RKE Key Fob does not
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position from the OFF
need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the
position.
system.
2
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Driving at speeds 5 MPH (8 km/h) and above To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
disables the system from responding to all RKE Key Fob Push and release the UNLOCK
button on the RKE
buttons for all RKE Key Fobs.
Key Fob once to unlock the driver’s door or twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors and liftgate.
The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the
unlock signal. The illuminated entry system will also
turn on.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
1st Press Of RKE Key Fob Unlocks
RKE Key Fob
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the
button on the RKE Key Fob. To change
UNLOCK
the current setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
Flash Lamps With Lock
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
or unlocked
with the RKE
the doors are locked
Key Fob. This feature can be turned on or turned off.
To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.
Push and release the LOCK
button on the RKE Key
Fob to lock all doors and liftgate. The turn signal lights
will flash, and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the
signal.
Headlight Illumination On Approach
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked
with the RKE Key Fob.
The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
equipped through Uconnect. To change the current
setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
Sound Horn With Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE Key Fob. This feature can be
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
2
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
vehicle when using the RKE Key Fob to turn off the
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push and hold
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
button on the RKE Key Fob for at least one
the
by the system.
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is activated, the turn signals will flash, the horn will pulse Programming Additional RKE Key Fobs
on and off, and the interior lights will turn on.
Programming RKE Key Fobs may be performed at an
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless authorized dealer.
you turn it off by either pushing the
button a second
RKE Key Fob Battery Replacement
time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 MPH
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
(24 km/h) or greater.
battery.
NOTE:
NOTE:
• The interior lights will turn off if you place the ignition
in the ACC or ON/RUN position while the Panic • Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights and
Batteries could contain dangerous materials. Please
horn will remain on.
dispose of them according to respect for environment
and local laws.
Using The Panic Alarm
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
• Used batteries are harmful to the environment. You
can dispose of them either in the correct containers as
specified by law or by taking them to an authorized
dealership, which will deal with their disposal.
2
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch on the back of the RKE Key Fob sideways with
your thumb and then pull the key out with your other
hand.
Separating RKE Key Fob Case
A — Emergency Key Release Button
B — Remove The Emergency Key
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key, #2 flat blade
screwdriver, or a coin into the slot and gently pry the
two halves of the RKE Key Fob apart. Make sure not to
damage the seal during removal.
Separating RKE Key Fob Case With A Coin
Separating RKE Key Fob Case With Emergency Key
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the
battery.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
5. To assemble the RKE Key Fob case, snap the two
halves together until they are tightly clamped.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op4. Fit a new battery in place of the depleted battery.
eration.
When replacing the battery, match the + sign on the
battery to the + sign on the inside of the back cover. NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers. by the party responsible for compliance could void the
Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch user’s authority to operate the equipment.
a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.
Replace Battery In The RKE Key Fob
2
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
• HAZARD switch off
This system uses the RKE Key Fob to start the • BRAKE switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
engine conveniently from outside the vehicle
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
while still maintaining security. The system has
a range of approximately 300 ft (91 m).
• RKE PANIC button not pushed
NOTE:
• Fuel meets minimum requirement
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
• System not disabled from previous Remote Start event
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
• Obstructions between the vehicle and the RKE Key • Vehicle security alarm not active
Fob may reduce this range.
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
• Gear selector in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
WARNING! (Continued)
• Keep RKE Key Fobs away from children. Operation of the Remote Start System, windows, door
locks or other controls could cause serious injury or
death.
Remote Start Abort Message On Driver
Information Display (DID) — If Equipped
The DID message stays active until the ignition is turned
to the ON/RUN position.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Push and release the REMOTE START button
on the
RKE Key Fob twice within five seconds. The parking
lights will flash, vehicle doors will lock, and the horn
will chirp twice (if programmed). Once the vehicle has
started, the engine will run for 15 minutes.
The following messages will display in the DID if the
NOTE:
vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prema• If your power door locks were unlocked, Remote Start
turely:
will automatically lock the doors.
• Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
• Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
• Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
• Remote Start Cancelled — System Fault
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
2
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• For security, power window and power sunroof op- To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, push and release
in the Remote Start mode.
button on the RKE Key Fob to unlock
the UNLOCK
• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm
15-minute cycles) with the RKE Key Fob. However, the System (if equipped). Then, prior to the end of the
ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN position 15-minute cycle, push and release the keyless ignition
button.
before you can repeat the start sequence for a third
cycle.
NOTE: “Remote Start Active — Push Start Button” will
display in the Driver Information Display (DID) until
you push the start button. Refer to “Driver Information
Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Push and release the REMOTE START
button one
Panel” for further information.
time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15minute cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system
will disable the one time push of the REMOTE START
button for two seconds after receiving a valid
Remote Start request.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
Comfort Systems — If Equipped
General Information
When Remote Start is activated, Auto-Comfort will work
anytime the temperature conditions are correct. When
the feature is enabled, regardless of Remote Start or
regular keyless start, the driver heated seat features will
automatically turn on in cold weather. In warm weather,
the driver vented seat feature will automatically turn on
when the Remote Start is activated. These features will
stay on through the duration of Remote Start or until the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opThe Comfort System can be activated and deactivated
eration.
through the Uconnect system. For more information on
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
Comfort System operation, refer to “Uconnect Settings”
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel.”
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
2
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
DOOR LOCKS
The power door locks can be manually locked from
inside the vehicle by using the door lock knob. To lock
each door, push the door lock knob on each door trim
panel downward. To unlock the front doors, pull the
inside door handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear
doors, pull the door lock knob on the door trim panel
upward. If the lock knob is down when the door is
closed, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the RKE
Key Fob is not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
NOTE: Manually locking the vehicle will not arm the
Vehicle Security Alarm.
Manual Door Lock Knob
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the transmission into PARK, apply the parking brake, turn the
engine OFF, remove the RKE Key Fob from the
ignition and lock your vehicle. If equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go, always make sure the keyless
ignition node is in “OFF” mode, remove the RKE
Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the RKE Key Fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and
do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
2
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the door lock switch is pushed down when the door is
The power door lock switches
are located on each closed, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the RKE
or unlock Key Fob is not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
front door panel. Push the switch to lock
the doors.
If the door lock switch is pushed while the ignition is in
ACC or ON/RUN and the driver’s door is open, the
doors will not lock.
Power Door Locks
If a rear door is locked, it cannot be opened from inside
the vehicle without first unlocking the door. The door
may be unlocked manually by raising the lock knob.
Power Door Lock Switch
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled. Doors
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically To provide a safer environment for small children riding
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your Child-Protection Door Lock system.
authorized dealer. The auto door lock feature is enabled/
To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection
disabled in the Uconnect Settings.
Door Lock System
Automatic Unlock On Exit Feature — If Equipped
1. Open the rear door.
If Auto Unlock is enabled, this feature will unlock all the
doors when any door is opened if the vehicle is stopped 2. Insert the tip of the emergency key into the lock and
or UNLOCK
position.
rotate to the LOCK
and in PARK. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
2
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
Child-Protection Door Lock Location
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged (locked).
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — PASSIVE ENTRY
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go. This feature allows you to
lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to
push the RKE Key Fob lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE: For emergency exit from the rear seats when the NOTE:
Child-Protection Door Lock System is engaged, manually
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF. Refer to
raise the door lock knob to the unlocked position, roll
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrudown the window, and open the door using the outside
ment Panel” for further information.
door handle.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock
and if equipped will arm the security alarm.
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower response time.
2
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE Key Fob within 5 ft (1.5
m) of the driver’s door handle, grab the driver’s front
door handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically.
The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the
door is unlocked.
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed
all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the driver’s
front door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver
Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,” refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE Key Fob within 5 ft (1.5
m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automatically.
The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the
door is unlocked.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE Passive Entry RKE Key Fobs are detected outside the
Key Fob In Vehicle
vehicle, the Passive Entry System automatically unlocks
all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times (on the
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive Entry
Passive Entry RKE Key Fob inside your vehicle, the
RKE Key Fob can be locked in the vehicle).
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
unlock feature which will function if the ignition is OFF. To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel
switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors
have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and
outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE
Key Fobs. If one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE Key
Fobs is detected inside the vehicle, and no other valid
The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built into the
electronic liftgate release. With a valid Passive Entry RKE
Key Fob within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the liftgate, push the
electronic liftgate release for a power open on vehicles
equipped with Power Liftgate. Push the electronic liftgate release and lift for Manual Liftgate vehicles.
2
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If the vehicle is unlocked, then the liftgate will To Lock The Vehicle From The Liftgate
open with the electronic liftgate release and no RKE Key
With a valid Passive Entry RKE Key Fob within 3 ft
Fob is required.
(1.0 m) of the liftgate, push the passive entry lock button
located to the right of electronic liftgate release.
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed
in Uconnect Settings, all doors will unlock when you
push the electronic liftgate release. If ⬙Unlock Driver
Door 1st Press⬙ is programmed in Uconnect, the liftgate
will only unlock when you push the electronic liftgate
release. For further information, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel.”
To Lock The Vehicle From The Front Doors
Passive Entry/Lock Button Location
1 — Electronic Liftgate Release
2 — Lock Button Location
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE Key Fobs
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handle, push the door handle LOCK button to lock all
four doors and liftgate.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
NOTE: The key must be within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the handle
being used to lock the vehicle.
Do NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the door
handle button. This could unlock the door(s).
2
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
General Information
• After pushing the door handle button, you must wait
two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors,
using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to
allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling
the door handle without the vehicle reacting and
unlocking.
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE
2. This device must accept any interference received,
Key Fob battery is dead.
including interference that may cause undesired op• Closeness to mobile devices can have an effect on the
eration.
passive entry system.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE by the party responsible for compliance could void the
Key Fob lock button or the lock button located on the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
vehicle’s interior door panel.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
WINDOWS
Power Windows
2
The power window controls
are located on the
switch on
driver’s door trim panel. There is a single
the front passenger door and rear
passenger doors
which operate the front and rear passenger door
windows. The window controls will operate only
when the keyless push button ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN or ACC position.
Power Window Switches
The power window switches remain active for up to ten
minutes after the keyless push button ignition has been
turned OFF. Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this
feature.
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do not
let children play with power windows. Do not leave the
RKE Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC
or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended
children, can become entrapped by the windows while
operating the power window switches. Such entrapment
may result in serious injury or death.
To open the window part way, push the
switch to the
first detent and release it when you want the window
to stop.
Auto-Down
Both the driver and front passenger window switches
have an “Auto-Down” feature. Push the window
switch past the first detent, release, and the window will go down automatically. To cancel the “AutoDown” movement, operate the switch in either the up
or down direction and release the switch.
Auto-Down Window Switches
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
Auto Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection —
Driver And Front Passenger Door Only
Lift the window
switch fully upward to the second
detent, release, and the window will go up automatically.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
switch briefly. Resetting The Auto Up Feature
“Auto Up” operation, push down on the
To close the window part way, lift the window
switch
to the first detent and release when you want the
window to stop.
Should the “Auto Up” feature stop working, the window
probably needs to be reset. To reset “Auto Up”:
switch up to close the window
1. Pull the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for
NOTE: If the window runs into any obstacle during
an additional two seconds after the window is
“Auto Up,” it will reverse direction and then go back
closed.
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window switch
again to close the window. Any impact due to rough road 2. Push the window
switch down firmly to the
conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexsecond detent to open the window completely and
pectedly during “Auto-Up.” If this happens, pull the
continue to hold the switch down for an additional
switch lightly to the first detent and hold it to close the
two seconds after the window is fully open.
window manually.
2
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Window Lockout Button
The Window Lockout
button on the driver’s door
allows you to disable the window controls on the rear
doors. To disable the window controls on the rear
button. To enable
doors, push the Window Lockout
the window controls, push the Window Lockout
button again.
Window Lockout Button
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
Wind Buffeting
LIFTGATE
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting.
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built into the
electronic liftgate release. With a valid Passive Entry RKE
Key Fob within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the liftgate, push the
electronic liftgate release to open with one fluid motion.
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed in
Uconnect Settings, all doors will unlock when you push
the electronic liftgate release. If ⬙Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press⬙ is programmed in Uconnect Settings, only the
liftgate will unlock when you push the electronic liftgate
release. For further information, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel.”
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry RKE Key Fob within 3 ft (1.0
m) of the liftgate, push the passive entry lock button
located to the right of electronic liftgate release.
2
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The liftgate unlock feature is built into the
electronic liftgate release.
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
Power Liftgate — If Equipped
Passive Entry/Lock Button Location
1 — Electronic Liftgate Release
2 — Lock Button Location
The power liftgate may be opened by pushing
the electronic liftgate release (refer to “Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” located in
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vebutton on the
hicle”) or by pushing the LIFTGATE
button on the
RKE Key Fob. Push the LIFTGATE
RKE Key Fob twice within five seconds to open the
power liftgate. Once the liftgate is open, pushing the
button twice within five seconds a second time will
close the liftgate.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
The power liftgate may also be opened or closed by NOTE:
pushing the LIFTGATE button located on the front
• In the event of a power malfunction to the liftgate, an
overhead console. If the liftgate is fully open, the liftgate
emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open
can be closed by pushing the LIFTGATE button located
the liftgate. The emergency liftgate latch release can be
on left rear trim panel, near the liftgate opening. If the
accessed through a snap-in cover located on the liftliftgate is in motion, pushing the LIFTGATE button
gate trim panel.
located on left rear trim panel will reverse the liftgate.
button on the RKE Key Fob is • If liftgate is left open for an extended period of time,
When the LIFTGATE
the liftgate may need to be closed manually to reset
pushed two times, the turn signals will flash twice to
power liftgate functionality.
signal that the liftgate is opening or closing (if Flash
Lamps with Lock is enabled in the Uconnect settings),
and the liftgate chime will be audible. For further
information, refer to ⬙Uconnect Settings⬙ in ⬙Understanding Your Instrument Panel.⬙
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is
clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched
before driving away.
2
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• If the liftgate is not fully open, push the Liftgate
button on the RKE Key Fob twice to operate the
• The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the
liftgate.
vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 MPH
• If the electronic liftgate release is pushed while the
(0 km/h).
power liftgate is closing, the liftgate will reverse to the
• The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures
full open position.
below −22° F (−30° C) or temperatures above 150° F
(65° C). Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice • If the electronic liftgate release is pushed while the
power liftgate is opening, the liftgate motor will disfrom the liftgate before pushing any of the power
engage to allow manual operation.
liftgate switches.
NOTE:
• If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is • If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions
within the same cycle, the system will automatically
closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically
stop and the liftgate must be opened or closed manureverse to the closed or open position, provided it
ally.
meets sufficient resistance.
• There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the
liftgate. Light pressure anywhere along these strips
will cause the liftgate to return to the open position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
• Supplemental Active Head Restraints
• Child Restraints
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
Some of the most important safety features in your 2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing
vehicle are the restraint systems:
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat,
move the seat as far back as possible and use the
• Seat Belt Systems
proper child restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints”)
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
2
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat 8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
belt properly (Refer to ⬙Child Restraints⬙ in this section
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
of “Occupant Restraints”) should be secured in a vehicle
between occupants and the door and occupants could
with a rear seat in child restraints or belt-positioning
be injured.
booster seats. Older children who do not use child
restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should ride
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
properly buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
them or under their arm.
under ⬙If You Need Assistance.⬙
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front
Air Bags room to inflate.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
Seat Belt Systems
Initial Indication
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and could cause a collision that includes you. This can
happen far away from home or on your own street.
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition is first placed
in the START or ON/RUN position, an intermittent
chime will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the
ignition is first placed in the START or ON/RUN position
the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on
until both outboard front seat belts are buckled. The
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when an outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle their
seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active whenever the
ignition is placed in the START or ON/RUN position.
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by
blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
2
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain
on until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning
sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the
driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling,
the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat
belts are buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items
are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when
the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended
that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts,
and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver
or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until
the driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts
are buckled.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt
will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
air bags.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
(Continued)
2
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If
you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take
it to your authorized dealer immediately and have
it fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
(Continued)
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of
the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect
the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be
replaced after a collision.
(Continued)
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front 3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low 5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortslack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate
down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract
fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
Positioning The Lap Belt
2
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180
degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above
the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the
shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to
position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or
squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage,
and move it up or down to the position that serves you
best.
Adjustable Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position,
and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the
shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down
to make sure that it is locked in position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pushing or squeezing the release button. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull
downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is
locked into position.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a
Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used
only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant, it must be removed.
WARNING!
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat
belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender
if, when worn, the distance between the front edge
of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
2
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen
and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the
shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck.
Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under
the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat
belt in the event of a collision. These devices may
improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an worn snugly and positioned properly.
accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child
if they are wearing a seat belt.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re- Restraints” section of this manual. The table below
straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten- defines the type of feature for each seating position.
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions that
may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of
a collision. This seat belt system has a retractor assembly
that is designed to release webbing in a controlled
manner.
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. • ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
For additional information, refer to “Installing Child If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the
2
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap
around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate
the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking
sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out
only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic
Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a 1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
seating position that has a seat belt with this feature. 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
Children 12 years old and under should always be
the entire seat belt is extracted.
properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
WARNING! (Continued)
only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraints that have a harness for restraining
the child.
Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is
(Continued)
These head restraints are passive, deployable components, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
identified by any markings, only through visual inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split
in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
2
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether the severity, or type of rear impact will require
the Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear
impact requires deployment, both the driver and front
passenger seat AHRs will be deployed.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts.
NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may
not deploy in the event of a front or side impact.
However if during a front impact, a secondary rear
impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based on the severity and type of the impact.
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Head Restraint Front Half (Soft Foam and Trim)
Seatback
Head Restraint Back Half (Decorative Plastic Rear Cover)
Head Restraint Guide Tubes
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their proper positions
in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the
event of a collision.
• Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable
DVD players. These items may interfere with the
operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event
of a collision and could result in serious injury or
death.
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are
struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose
cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured,
(Continued)
as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint during sudden stops. Failure to follow this
warning could cause personal injury if the Active
Head Restraint is deployed.
NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and
positioning the head restraint, refer to “Adjusting Active
Head Restraints” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle.”
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
If the Active Head Restraints are triggered during a
collision, the front half of the head restraint will be
extended forward and separated from the rear half of the
head restraint (See Image). Do not drive your vehicle
after the AHRs have deployed. The head restraint must
be reset into the original position to best protect the
occupant for all types of collisions. An authorized FCA
2
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
US LLC dealer must reset the AHRs on the driver’s and
front passenger’s seat before driving. Personally attempting to reset the AHRs may result in damage to the AHRs
that could impair their function.
WARNING!
Deployed AHRs are not able to best protect you in all
types of collisions. Have deployed AHRs reset by an
authorized dealer immediately.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Air Bag System Components
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
system components:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
AHR In Reset Position
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Advanced Front Air Bags
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Advanced Front Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the 1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The 2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on 3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Knee Air Bag
the air bag covers.
2
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat
belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel
because any such objects could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the
air bag to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
(Continued)
some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have air
bags.
Advanced Front Air Bag Operation
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk
of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal
collisions, including some that may produce substantial
vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,
truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes
with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
severe initial deceleration.
2
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occupants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli- Air Bags.
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
WARNING!
away from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right
side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the
way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The Advanced
Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the
steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
provides enhanced protection during a frontal impact by
working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and
Advanced Front Air Bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags:
1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs):
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The
SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIR- The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
BAG” label sewn into the outboard side of the seats. during certain side impacts and/or vehicle rollover
events, in addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
2
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the out- 2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
board side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB
(SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim
deploys through the seat seam into the space between the
covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or
occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high
“AIRBAG.”
speed and with such a high force that it could injure
occupants if they are not seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children
are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air
bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head or other injuries
to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side
impacts and/or vehicle rollover events, in addition to the
injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and
body structure.
The SABICs deploy downward, covering the side windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
trim out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs
inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they are
not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned
in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side
windows in certain rollover or side impact events.
WARNING!
• Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs). Do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the deployment of the
SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows where the SABIC and its deployment path
are located should remain free from any obstructions.
• Your vehicle is equipped with SABICs. In order for
the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any
accessory items in your vehicle which could alter
the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
2
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The SABICs and SABs (“Side Air Bags”) are designed to
activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover
events. The Occupant Restraint Controller (“ORC”) determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in
a particular side impact or rollover event is appropriate,
based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. Occupants, including children, who are
up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously
injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should
never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the Side Air Bags inflate, even if they are in an
infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are
necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also
help keep you in position, away from inflating Side Air
Bags. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags,
occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit
upright with their backs against the seats. Children must
be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat
that is appropriate for the size of the child.
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
WARNING! (Continued)
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air
Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even
though you have Side Air Bags.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced
Front Air Bags deploy.
Rollover Events
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover
events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is approSide Impacts
priate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
determining the appropriate response to impact events. Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events.
the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require
The rollover sensing-system determines if a rollover
Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the
event may be in progress and whether deployment is
Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right side appropriate. A slower-developing event may deploy the
seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle. A
impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.
2
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
faster-developing event may deploy the seat belt pretensioners as well as the Side Air Bags on both sides of the
vehicle. The rollover sensing-system may also deploy the
seat belt pretensioners, with or without the Side Air Bags,
on both sides of the vehicle if the vehicle experiences a
near rollover event.
If A Deployment Occurs
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a
carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and
normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed
significantly within a few days, or if you have any
blistering, see your doctor immediately.
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate • As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
immediately after deployment.
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
the air bag system.
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
or all of the following may occur:
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
structions for cleaning.
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de- Enhanced Accident Response System
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air In the event of an impact, if the communication network
bags will not be in place to protect you.
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine
WARNING!
whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response SysDeployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot tem perform the following functions:
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller
System serviced as well.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the hazard light button is pressed. The hazard
lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light
button.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power.
• Unlock the power door locks.
2
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition must be changed
from the START or ON/RUN position to the OFF position. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the
engine compartment and on the ground near the engine
compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system
and starting the engine.
Air Bag Warning Light
The air bags must be ready to inflate for your protection
in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and
interconnecting wiring associated with air bag
system electrical components.
START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition is in the OFF
position or in the ACC position, the air bag system is not
on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
for a self-check when the ignition is first placed in the
ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag
Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag
Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on
again after initial startup.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate
the air bag system whenever the ignition is placed in the the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect the air bag system. The
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance
free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition is first
placed in the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is detected,
remains on while driving.
which could affect the Supplemental Restraint
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
System (“SRS”), the Redundant Air Bag Warnrelated gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
ing Light will illuminate on the instrument
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protec- will stay on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single
tion. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag chime will sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag
system immediately.
Warning Light has come on and a fault has been detected.
2
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on
intermittently or remains on while driving have an
authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. For
additional information regarding the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light refer to the “Warning and Indicator
Lights” in “Understanding Your Instrument panel” of
this manual.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
These data can help provide a better understanding of
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will the EDR under normal driving conditions and no perassist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per- sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to are recorded. However, other parties, such as law envehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
is designed to record such data as:
crash investigation.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating; To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
were buckled/fastened;
such as law enforcement, that have the special equip• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the ment, can read the information if they have access to the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
vehicle or the EDR.
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
2
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Child Restraints
WARNING! (Continued)
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children.
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
Every state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in proper
restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosThere are different sizes and types of restraints for
ecuted for ignoring it.
children from newborn size to the child almost large
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
the rear seats rather than in the front.
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
Manual and on all the labels attached to the child
WARNING!
restraint.
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
(Continued)
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
NOTE:
• For
additional
information,
refer
www.seatcheck.org or call 1-866-732-8243.
• Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s website for additional information: www.tc.gc.ca/
to
eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-childsafetyindex-53.htm
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infants and Toddlers
Small Children
Child Size, Height, Weight Or
Age
Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not
reached the height or weight limits
of their child restraint
Children who are at least two
years old or who have out-grown
the height or weight limit of their
rear-facing child restraint
Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint, facing
rearward in the rear seat of the vehicle
Forward-Facing Child Restraint
with a five-point Harness, facing
forward in the rear seat of the vehicle
2
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Larger Children
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Child Size, Height, Weight Or
Age
Children who have out-grown
their forward-facing child restraint,
but are too small to properly fit
the vehicle’s seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger,
who have out-grown the height or
weight limit of their booster seat
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing
in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they
reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing
child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.
It is recommended for children from birth until they
Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and
the vehicle seat belt, seated in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear
seat of the vehicle
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats
often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant
carrier but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
highest weight or height allowed by their convertible have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
child seat.
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
WARNING!
allowed by the child seat.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front All children whose weight or height is above the
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear- belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
facing child restraint.
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
with a rear seat.
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
Older Children And Child Restraints
in the vehicle by the seat belt.
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who
2
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attachments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
(Continued)
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the
way back?
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
between their neck and arm?
correctly.
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
2
92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH –
Seat Belt Only
LATCH –
Seat Belt + Top
Lower Anchors
Lower Anchors
Tether Anchor
Only
+ Top Tether
Anchor
X
X
X
X
X
X
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCHequipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
2
94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
•
•
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per
seating position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system
weight + weight of the child reuntil the combined weight of the
straint) for using the LATCH anchild and the child restraint is
chorage system to attach the child
65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt
restraint?
and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH system once the combined
weight is more than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg).
No
Do not use the seat belt when you
Can the LATCH anchorages and
the seat belt be used together to
use the LATCH anchorage system
attach a rear-facing or forwardto attach a rear-facing or forwardfacing child restraint?
facing child restraint.
Can a child seat be installed in the
No
Use the seat belt and tether anchor
center position using the inner
to install a child seat in the center
LATCH lower anchorages?
seating position.
2
96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
Can two child restraints be atNo
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage
tached using a common lower
with two or more child restraints.
LATCH anchorage?
If the center position does not have
dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a
child seat in the center position
next to a child seat using the
LATCH anchorages in an outboard
position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint
Yes
The child seat may touch the back
touch the back of the front passenof the front passenger seat if the
ger seat?
child restraint manufacturer also
allows contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
Can the head restraints be reYes
The head restraint may be removed
moved?
in the center seating position only.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97
Locating LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the
gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
2
LATCH Anchorages
Locating Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located on the back of the
98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
seat. To access them, pull the carpeted floor panel away
from the seat back, this will expose the top tether strap
anchorages.
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top
Tether Strap Anchorage
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top
Tether Strap Anchorage
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be Center Seat LATCH
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
WARNING!
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some • Do not install a child restraint in the center position using the LATCH system. This position is not
rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a
approved for installing child seats using the
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end
LATCH attachments. You must use the seat belt
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
and tether anchor to install a child seat in the center
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
seating position.
• Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. Please refer to ⴖInstalling
Child Restraints Using the LATCH Lower Anchoragesⴖ in the section ⴖInstalling Child Restraintsⴖ for
typical installation instructions.
2
100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Center Arm Rest Tether
For rear-facing child restraints secured in the center seat
position with the vehicle seat belts, the rear center seat
position has an armrest tether that secures the arm rest in
the upward position.
1. To access the center seat arm rest tether, first lower the
arm rest. The tether is located behind the armrest and
hooked onto the plastic seat backing.
Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether
2. Pull down on the tether to unhook it from the plastic
seat backing.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101
3. Raise the armrest and attach the tether hook to the To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
strap located on the front of the arm rest.
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt, following the instructions below. See the section
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt”
to check what type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether Attached
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manuforward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
restraint systems will be installed as described here.
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward
to allow more room for the child seat.
2
102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt:
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat- When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
ing position.
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the used by other occupants or being used to secure child
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc- with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH system,
tions to attach a tether anchor.
buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
in the straps according to the child restraint manufac- behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
turer’s instructions.
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) them.
in any direction.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to
be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking
Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints” for additional information on ALR.
2
104 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 105
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s
Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when
weight + weight of the child reusing the seat belt to install a forstraint) for using the Tether Anchor
ward facing child restraint, up to
with the seat belt to attach a forthe recommended weight limit of
ward facing child restraint?
the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint
Yes
Contact between the front passentouch the back of the front passenger seat and the child restraint is
ger seat?
allowed, if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be reYes
The head restraint may be removed
moved?
in the center seating position only.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
tighten the seat belt against the belt
seating position with an ALR repath of the child restraint?
tractor.
2
106 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
Place the child seat in the center of the seating
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webrear-most position to make room for the child seat.
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
more room for the child seat.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.
vehicle seat.
Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
“click.”
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints
Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to
against the child seat.
attach a tether anchor.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
1.
2.
3.
4.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 107
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether
Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat
to any location in front of the car seat, including the
seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether
anchorage that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the
section “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System” for the location of approved tether anchorages in your vehicle.
2
108 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.
You may need to move the seat forward to provide
better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top
tether anchorage for that seating position, move the
child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one
is available.
2. To access the top tether strap anchorages behind the
rear seat, pull the carpeted floor panel away from the
seat back, this will expose the top tether strap anchorages.
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top
Tether Strap Anchorage
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 109
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
4. For the center seating position, route the tether strap
over the seatback and headrest then attach the hook to
the tether anchor located on the back of the seat.
Top Tether Strap Anchorage (Located on Seatback)
2
110 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
Top Tether Strap Mounting
6. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING!
• The top tether anchorages are not visible until the
gap panel is folded down. Do not use the visible
cargo tie down hooks, located on the floor behind
the seats, to attach a child restraint tether anchor.
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 111
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
However, wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
be detrimental and should be avoided.
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
The engine oil, transmission fluid, and axle lubricant
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses installed at the factory is high-quality and energyconserving. Oil, fluid, and lubricant changes should be
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
consistent with anticipated climate and conditions under
which vehicle operations will occur. For the recomENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
mended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “MainteFor vehicles equipped with the 3.6L or 5.7L use the
nance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
following engine break-in recommendations:
Transporting Pets
A long break-in period is not required for the drivetrain
(engine, transmission, clutch, and rear axle) in your new
vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 mi (500 km). After
the initial 60 mi (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80
or 90 km/h) are desirable.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
2
112 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as an indication of difficulty. Please check
your oil level with the engine oil indicator often during
the break in period. Add oil as required.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 113
Exhaust Gas
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
(Continued)
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
2
114 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized
dealer as soon as possible. This light will illuminate
with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag
Seat Belts
Warning Light has been detected, it will stay on until
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be or remains on while driving, have an authorized
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the dealer service the vehicle immediately. Refer to “Ocsystem.
cupant Restraints” for further information.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat
belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
The Air Bag warning light
will turn on for four to Floor Mat Safety Information
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is first
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
placed in the ON/RUN position. If the light is either
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
not on during starting, stays on, or turns on while
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 115
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
WARNING! (Continued)
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
(Continued)
(Continued)
2
116 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Door Latches
Tires
Fluid Leaks
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .135
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped . . . .125
▫ Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With Memory
Seat Only) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .126
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . .133
▫ Power Folding Outside Mirrors —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
▫ Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
▫ Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
䡵 BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
▫ Rear Cross Path (RCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
▫ Modes Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
3
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146 䡵 DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED . . . .164
▫ Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
▫ Programming The Memory Feature . . . . . . . . .165
▫ Power Lumbar — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .148
▫ Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless
Entry Key Fob To Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
▫ Manual Front Seats Forward/Rearward
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
▫ Manual Front Passenger Seatback Adjustment —
Recline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
▫ Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . .
▫ Front Passenger Seat Fold-Flat Feature —
䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . .
▫ Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . .156
▫ Headlights On Automatically With Wipers
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
▫ Automatic High Beam — If Equipped . . .
▫ 60/40 Split Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . .
▫ Reclining Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
. . .168
. . .170
. . .170
. . .171
. . .172
. . .172
. . .173
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
▫ Automatic Headlight Leveling —
HID Headlights Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
▫ Headlight Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
▫ Parking Lights And Panel Lights. . . . . . . . . . .174
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
▫ Battery Saver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped . . .177
▫ Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
▫ Ambient Light — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .179
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
▫ High/Low Beam Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .181
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
▫ Windshield Washer Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . .182
▫ Mist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . .184
䡵 HEADLIGHT WASHERS — IF EQUIPPED . . . .186
䡵 TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .186
䡵 POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
3
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 HEATED STEERING WHEEL —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
䡵 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
▫ To Activate/Deactivate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
▫ To Set A Desired ACC Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
▫ To Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
▫ To Turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
▫ To Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC . . . . . .204
▫ Overtake Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
▫ ACC Operation At Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu . . . . . . .209
▫ Display Warnings And Maintenance . . . . . . . .210
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . . .196
▫ Precautions While Driving With ACC . . . . . . .213
▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC). . . .197
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
▫ Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed
Control Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
䡵 FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)
WITH MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . .221
▫ Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
▫ Turning FCW ON Or OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
▫ Changing FCW And Active Braking Status. . . .223
▫ FCW Limited Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
▫ Service FCW Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
䡵 PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
▫ ParkSense Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
▫ ParkSense Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
▫ ParkSense Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense . . . . . . . . .233
▫ Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . .235
▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions . . . . . . . .235
䡵 PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
▫ ParkSense Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
▫ ParkSense Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
▫ ParkSense Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense . . . . . . . . .246
▫ Service The ParkSense Park Assist System . . . .247
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . .248
3
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions . . . . . . . .248
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
䡵 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
䡵 OVERHEAD CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped . . .253
▫ Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
▫ Sunglasses Bin Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .255
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink . . .256
▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .258
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .260
▫ Using HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .263
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .264
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .265
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
▫ Sunshade Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
▫ Relearn Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
䡵 COMMANDVIEW SUNROOF WITH POWER
SHADE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .269
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .269
▫ Opening Power Shade — Express . . . . . . . . . .269
▫ Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode . . . . .269
▫ Closing Power Shade — Express . . . . . . . . . . .270
▫ Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode . . . . . .270
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . .271
䡵 POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .276
䡵 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
䡵 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
▫ Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
▫ Door Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
▫ Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
䡵 CARGO AREA FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
▫ Rechargeable Flashlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
3
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Cargo Storage Bins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283 䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
▫ Retractable Cargo Area Cover —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
▫ Rear Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
䡵 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED . . . . .290
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right
for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to
center on the view through the rear window.
3
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror
should be adjusted while set in the day position (toward
the windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right
for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to
center on the view through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you.
NOTE: The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled when the vehicle is in reverse gear to improve rear
view viewing.
The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature can be turned
On or Off through the touchscreen.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
• Press the Mirror Dimmer button once to turn the If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and
a 9-1-1 button.
feature On.
• Press the Mirror Dimmer button a second time to turn
the feature Off.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
NOTE:
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you
to any one of the following support centers:
• Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a
tow, just push the ASSIST button and you’ll be connected to someone who can help. Roadside Assistance
will know what vehicle you’re driving and its location.
Additional fees may apply for roadside Assistance.
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
• Uconnect Access Customer Care – In-vehicle support
for Uconnect Access and Uconnect Access Via Mobile
• The 9–1–1 and ASSIST buttons will only function if
features.
you are connected to an operable 1X(voice/data) or
3G(data) network. Other Uconnect services will only • Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
be operable if your Uconnect Access service is active
vehicle issues.
and you are connected to an operable 1X(voice/data)
9-1-1 Call
or 3G(data) network.
1. Push the 9-1-1 Call button on the Rearview Mirror.
3
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: In case the 9-1-1 Call button is pushed in error, 4. You should be able to speak with the 9-1-1 operator
there will be a 10 second delay before the 9-1-1 Call
through the vehicle audio system to determine if
additional help is needed.
system initiates a call to a 9-1-1 operator. To cancel the
9-1-1 Call connection, push the 9-1-1 Call button on the
Rearview Mirror or press the cancellation button on the
WARNING!
Device Screen. Termination of the 9-1-1 Call will turn off
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
the green LED light on the Rearview Mirror.
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
2. The LED light located between the ASSIST and 9-1-1 and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a (voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
connection to a 9-1-1 operator has been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a 9-1-1
operator is made, the 9-1-1 Call system may transmit
the following important vehicle information to a 9-1-1
operator:
• Indication that the occupant placed a 9-1-1 Call.
• The vehicle brand.
• The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
• Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s
9-1-1 Call system and the 9-1-1 operator, the 9-1-1
operator may be able to open a voice connection with
the vehicle to determine if additional help is needed.
Once the 9-1-1 operator opens a voice connection
with the vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system, the operator
should be able to speak with you or other vehicle
occupants and hear sounds occurring in the vehicle.
The vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system will attempt to remain connected with the 9-1-1 operator until the
9-1-1 operator terminates the connection.
5. The 9-1-1 operator may attempt to contact appropriate
emergency responders and provide them with important vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g.,
fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions
or location), do not wait for voice contact from a
9-1-1 operator. All occupants should exit the vehicle
immediately and move to a safe location.
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
operable 1X (voice/data) or 3G(data) network and
GPS antennas. You could prevent operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and GPS signal
reception, which can prevent your vehicle from
placing an emergency call. An operable 1X (voice/
data) or 3G(data) network and GPS signal reception is required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function
properly.
(Continued)
3
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• The 9-1-1 Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add aftermarket
electrical equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a
signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that can cause the 9-1-1 Call system to fail,
never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way
mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your
vehicle’s electrical system or modify the antennas
on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING
DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE
UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND SERVICES,
AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE.
• Modifications to any part of the 9-1-1 Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you
need it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to help protect you.
9-1-1 Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico DO NOT have 9-1-1
Call system capabilities.
9-1-1 or other emergency line operators in Canada and
Mexico may not answer or respond to 9-1-1 system calls.
If the 9-1-1 Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is
detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
• The Rearview Mirror light located between the ASSIST
and 9-1-1 buttons will continuously be illuminated
red.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
• The Device Screen will display the following message Even if the 9-1-1 Call system is fully functional, factors
“Vehicle device requires service. Please contact your beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the
dealer.”
9-1-1 Call system operation. These include, but are not
limited to, the following factors:
• An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle device requires service. Please contact your dealer.”
• Delayed accessories mode is active.
WARNING!
• Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you
will not have 9-1-1 Call services. If the Rearview
Mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service the 9-1-1 Call system immediately.
• The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on
the air bag Warning Light on the instrument panel
if a malfunction in any part of the system is
detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer service the Occupant Restraint Control system immediately.
• The ignition is in the OFF position.
• The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
• The 9-1-1 Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash.
• The vehicle battery loses power or becomes disconnected during a vehicle crash.
• 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and/or Global
Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or obstructed.
• Equipment malfunction at the 9-1-1 operator facility.
3
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Operator error by the 9-1-1 operator.
• 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) network congestion.
• Weather.
• Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
NOTE:
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) and GPS antennas. You could
prevent 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) and GPS signal
reception, which can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency call. An operable 1X (voice/data) or
3G (data) network connection and a GPS signal is
required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function properly.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
by the subscriber.
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
CAUTION!
WARNING! (Continued)
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Some vehicles will not have a convex passenger side
mirror.
Outside Mirrors
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirrors
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
three detent positions:
WARNING!
• Full forward position
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
• Full rearward position
(Continued)
• Normal position
3
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Folding Outside Mirrors — If Equipped
If equipped with power folding mirrors, they can be
electrically folded rearward and unfolded into the drive
position.
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located
between the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right).
Push the switch once and the mirrors will fold in, push
the switch a second time and the mirrors will return to
the normal driving position.
If the mirror is manually folded after electrically cycled,
a potential extra button push is required to get the
Power Folding Mirror Switch
mirrors back to the home position. If the mirror does not
Power
Mirrors
electrically fold check for ice or dirt build up at the pivot
area which can cause excessive drag.
The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s side
door trim panel.
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
mirror, push the mirror select button for the mirror that
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
you want to adjust. Using the mirror control switch, push Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by
on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want the optional Memory Seat Feature. Refer to “Driver
the mirror to move.
Memory Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors — If
Equipped
The outside mirrors will automatically adjust for glare
from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled by
the inside automatic dimming mirror. The mirrors will
automatically adjust for headlight glare when the inside
mirror adjusts.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
Power Mirror Switch
1 — Mirror Direction Control
2 — Mirror Selection
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear
Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle” for further information.
3
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With Memory
Seat Only) — If Equipped
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down one of
Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror the visors.
positioning which will aid the drivers view of the ground
Lift the cover to reveal the mirror. The light will turn on
rearward of the front doors. Outside mirrors will move
automatically.
slightly downward from the present position when the
vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. Outside mirrors will
then return to the original position when the vehicle is
shifted out of REVERSE position. Each stored memory
seat setting will have an associated Tilt Mirrors in Reverse position.
NOTE: The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not turned
on when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Mirrors in
Reverse feature can be turned on and off using the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer
Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature — If Equipped
The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for additional flexibility in positioning the sun visor to block out
the sun.
3
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the center clip.
3. Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview mirror to
extend it.
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF
EQUIPPED
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radarbased sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational. The
BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any
forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode
when the vehicle is in PARK.
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane • The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The zone
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually
length starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends
verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle
approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the
and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or
vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection zones on
other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert
BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire
the driver of vehicles in these areas.
time the vehicle is in a forward gear.
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
• The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver about
contamination so that the BSM system can function
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the deproperly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where
tection zones.
the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
NOTE:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
3
Sensor Location
Warning Light Location
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume.
Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further information.
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to
see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an
alert during these types of zone entries.
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Entering From The Side
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side of the vehicle.
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Side Monitoring
Rear Monitoring
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed
less than 10 mph (16 km/h) and the vehicle remains in
the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning
light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
3
Overtaking/Passing
Overtaking/Approaching
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage, traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert adjacent lanes.
on such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
Opposing Traffic
Stationary Objects
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicles
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
3
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
driver when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately
3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of
approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot
situations.
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.
Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer
Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side
WARNING!
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when
RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be the system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode,
used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a the system will respond with both visual and audible
parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check audible alert is requested, the radio is muted.
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before back- When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
ing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
death.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an
alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime
will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected object are present on the same side at the same
time, both the visual and audible alerts will be issued. In
addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be
muted.
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle
is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
used.
General Information
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications
NOTE: Whenever an audible alert is requested by the Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada
BSM system, the radio is also muted.
Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio 1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
is also muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the 2. The device must accept any interference received,
RCP state always requests the chime.
including interference that may cause undesired opBlind Spot Alert Off
eration of the device.
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP other than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
systems.
3
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
SEATS
Power Seats — If Equipped
Seats are part of the Occupant Restraint System of the Some models may be equipped with eight-way power
vehicle.
driver and front passenger seats. The power seat switches
are located on the outboard side of the seat. There are two
switches that control the movement of the seat cushion
WARNING!
and the seatback.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position has been reached.
Power Seat Switches
1 — Seatback Switch
2 — Seat Switch
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the front of
the seat switch. The front of the seat cushion will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
3
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Reclining The Seatback
WARNING! (Continued)
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward,
the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
(Continued)
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may also be equipped with power lumbar. The power
lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the
power seat. Push the switch forward to increase the
lumbar support. Push the switch rearward to decrease
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
the lumbar support. Pushing upward or downward on Manual Front Seats Forward/Rearward
the switch will raise and lower the position of the Adjustment
support.
Some models may be equipped with a manual front
passenger seat. The seat can be adjusted forward or
rearward by using a bar located by the front of the seat
cushion, near the floor.
Power Lumbar Switch
Adjustment Bar
3
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar located under
the seat cushion and move the seat forward or rearward.
Release the bar once you have reached the desired
position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters
have latched.
Manual Front Passenger Seatback Adjustment —
Recline
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired
position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift
the lever, lean forward and release the lever.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Recline Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
3
Front Passenger Seat Fold-Flat Feature — If
Equipped
To fold the seatback to the flat load-floor position, lift the
recline lever and push the seatback forward. To return to
the seating position, raise the seatback and lock it into
place.
Fold-Flat Passenger Seat
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
(Continued)
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
properly adjusted, and you could be severely injured or killed. Only adjust a seat while the vehicle
is parked.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
seat belt is no longer resting against your chest. In
a collision, you could slide under the seat belt and
be severely injured or killed. Use the recliner only
when the vehicle is parked.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front and rear seats may be
equipped with heaters located in the seat cushions and
seat backs.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
WARNING! (Continued)
serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.
• Press the heated seat button
the heating elements OFF.
a third time to turn
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the display
Front Heated Seats
will change from HI to LO, indicating the change. The
The front heated seats control buttons are located within
LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after apthe climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
proximately 45 minutes.
You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat settings. The
NOTE:
indicator arrows in touchscreen buttons indicate the level
of heat in use. Two indicator arrows will illuminate for • Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within
HI, one for LO and none for OFF.
two to five minutes.
• Press the heated seat button
setting ON.
• Press the heated seat button
the LO setting ON.
once to turn the HI • The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
a second time to turn
3
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated seats can be programmed to come on during a
remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat settings. Amber
On some models, the two rear outboard seats may be indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in
equipped with heated seats. There are two heated seat use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for
LO and none for OFF.
switches that allow the rear passengers to operate the
seats independently. The heated seat switches for each
Push the switch once to select HI-level heating.
heater are located on the rear of the center console.
Push the switch a second time to select LOlevel heating. Push the switch a third time to
shut the heating elements OFF.
Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
normal HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the
system will automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that
time, the number of indicator lights changes from two to
one, indicating the change. The LO-level setting will turn
OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
Rear Heated Seat Switches
3
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within
two to five minutes.
• The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
WARNING! (Continued)
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.
Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
(Continued)
Located in the seat cushion and seat back are fans that
draw the air from the passenger compartment and move
air through fine perforations in the seat cover to help
keep the driver and front passenger cooler in higher
ambient temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds,
HI and LO.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are located
within the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the
control buttons through the climate screen or the controls
screen.
• Press the ventilated seat button
once to choose HI.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
• Press the ventilated seat button
choose LO.
a second time to Head Restraints
• Press the ventilated seat button
turn the ventilated seat OFF.
a third time to
NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
ventilated seats can be programmed to come on during a
remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rearimpact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
3
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button, located at the base of the head restraint, and
Active Head Restraints are passive, deployable compopush downward on the head restraint.
nents, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
identified by any markings, only through visual inspection of the head restraint. The Active Head Restraints
(AHR) will be split in two halves, with the front half
being soft foam and trim, the back half being decorative
plastic.
Supplemental Active Head Restraints — Front
Seats
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to reduce the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is design to reduce the risk of injury to the
driver or front passenger in certain types of rear impacts.
Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
Adjustment Button
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted
forward and rearward. To tilt the head restraint closer to
the back of your head, pull forward on the bottom of the
head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head
restraint to move the head restraint away from your
head.
3
Active Head Restraint (Tilted)
NOTE:
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
• The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of
the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer.
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• In the event of deployment of an Active Head Restraint, refer to “Occupant Restraints/Resetting Active
Head Restraints (AHR)” in “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their proper positions
in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the
event of a collision.
• Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable
DVD players. These items may interfere with the
operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event
of a collision and could result in serious injury or
death.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are
struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose
cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured,
as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint during sudden stops. Failure to follow this
warning could cause personal injury if the Active
Head Restraint is deployed.
Head Restraints — Rear Seats
The head restraints on the outboard seats are not adjustable. They automatically fold forward when the rear seat
is folded to a load floor position but do not return to their
normal position when the rear seat is raised. After
returning either seat to its upright position, raise the head
restraint until it locks in place. The outboard head
restraints are not removable.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
The center head restraint has limited adjustment. Lift
upward on the head restraint to raise it, or push downward on the head restraint to lower it.
WARNING!
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its lowered
position could result in serious injury or death in a
collision. Always make sure the outboard head restraints are in their upright positions when the seat is
to be occupied.
NOTE: For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether, refer to
“Occupant Restraints” in “Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
60/40 Split Rear Seat
To Lower Rear Seat
Rear Head Restraint
Either side of the rear seat can be lowered to allow for
extended cargo space and still maintain some rear seating
room.
3
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and NOTE:
positioned forward. This will allow the rear seatback to
• Do not fold the 60% rear seat down with the left
fold down easily.
outboard or rear center seat belt buckled.
1. Pull upward on the release lever to release the seat.
• Do not fold the 40% rear seat down with the right
outboard seat belt buckled.
2. Fold the rear seat completely forward.
Rear Seat Release
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
To Raise Rear Seat
Raise the rear seatback and lock it into place. If interference from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully
locking, you will have difficulty returning the seat to its
proper position.
WARNING!
Rear Seat Folded
NOTE: You may experience deformation in the seat
cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left
folded for an extended period of time. This is normal and
by simply opening the seats to the open position, over
time the seat cushion will return to its normal shape.
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in a collision. Children should
be seated and using the proper restraint system.
3
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Reclining Rear Seat
To recline the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back and release the lever
at the desired position. To return the seatback, lift the
lever, lean forward and release the lever.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to store up to two different
memory profiles for easy recall through a memory
switch. Each memory profile contains desired position
settings for the driver seat, side mirrors, and power tilt
and telescopic steering column (if equipped) and a set of
desired radio station presets. Your Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) Key Fob can also be programmed to recall the
same positions when the UNLOCK button is pushed.
Rear Seat Release
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with two RKE Key
Fobs, one RKE Key Fob can be linked to memory position
1 and the other Key Fob can be linked to memory
position 2.
3
The memory seat switch is located on the driver’s door
trim panel. The switch consists of three buttons:
• The (S) button, which is used to activate the memory
save function.
• The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to recall either
of two pre-programmed memory profiles.
Memory Seat Switch
Programming The Memory Feature
NOTE: To create a new memory profile, perform the
following:
1. Cycle the vehicles ignition to the ON/RUN position
(Do not start the engine).
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror, power tilt and telescopic
steering column [if equipped], and radio station presets).
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
Key Fob To Memory
4. Within five seconds, push and release either of the
memory buttons (1) or (2). The Driver Information
Display (DID) will display which memory position
has been set.
must select the “Memory Linked To FOB” feature
through the Uconnect system screen. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings ” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
NOTE:
To program your RKE Key Fobs, perform the following:
Your RKE Key Fobs can be programmed to recall one of
two pre-programmed memory profiles by pushing the
3. Push and release the S (Set) button on the memory UNLOCK button on the RKE Key Fob.
switch.
NOTE: Before programming your RKE Key Fobs you
• Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in 1. Cycle the vehicles ignition to the OFF position.
PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a 2. Select a desired memory profile (1) or (2).
memory profile.
NOTE: If a memory profile has not already been set, refer
• To set a memory profile to your RKE Key Fob, refer to to ⬙Programming The Memory Feature⬙ in this section for
“Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry instructions on how to set a memory profile.
Key Fob To Memory” in this section.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and release Driver One Memory Position Recall
the SET (S) button on the memory switch.
• To recall the memory settings for driver one using the
memory switch, push MEMORY button number 1 on
4. Within five seconds, push and release button (1) or (2)
the memory switch.
accordingly. “Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display
in the instrument cluster.
• To recall the memory settings for driver one using the
RKE Key Fob, push the UNLOCK button on the RKE
5. Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE Key
Key Fob linked to memory position 1.
Fob within 10 seconds.
NOTE: Your RKE Key Fobs can be unlinked to your Driver Two Memory Position Recall
memory settings by pushing the SET (S) button, and
• To recall the memory setting for driver two using the
within 10 seconds, followed by pushing the UNLOCK
memory switch, push MEMORY button number 2 on
button on the RKE Key Fob.
the memory switch.
Memory Position Recall
• To recall the memory settings for driver two using the
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory
RKE Key Fob, push the UNLOCK button on the RKE
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not
Key Fob linked to memory position 2.
in PARK, a message will be displayed in the Driver A recall can be cancelled by pushing any of the MEMORY
Information Display (DID).
buttons during a recall (S, 1, or 2). When a recall is
3
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
cancelled, the driver’s seat and steering column (if • The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
driver seat position is less than 0.9 of an inch (22.7 mm)
equipped) stop moving. A delay of one second will occur
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
before another recall can be selected.
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
or Easy Entry.
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
Entry and Easy Exit position.
vehicle.
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where
the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy
you have the driver seat positioned when you cycle the
Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through
vehicle’s ignition to the OFF position.
the programmable features in the Uconnect system. Refer
• When you cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the OFF to “Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Feaposition, the driver seat will move about 2.4 inches (60 tures” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
mm) rearward if the driver seat position is greater than further information.
or equal to 2.7 inches (67.7 mm) forward of the rear
stop. The seat will return to its previously set position TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
when you cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the ACC or To open the hood, two latches must be released.
RUN position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
1. Pull the release lever located below the instrument
panel and in front of the driver’s door.
3
Safety Latch Location
Hood Release
2. Reach under the hood, move safety latch to the left
and lift the hood.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
(Continued)
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Use a firm downward push at the front center
of the hood to ensure that both latches engage.
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel, next to the steering wheel. The headlight switch controls the operation of the headlights,
parking lights, instrument panel lights, cargo lights and
fog lights (if equipped).
Headlight Switch
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight
switch clockwise. When the headlight switch is
on, the parking lights, taillights, license plate
light and instrument panel lights are also
turned on. To turn off the headlights, rotate the headlight
switch back to the O (Off) position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
NOTE:
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
• Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight and
fog light (if equipped) lenses that are lighter and less
susceptible to stone breakage than glass lights. Plastic
is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch to the A (AUTO) position.
When the system is on, the Headlight Delay feature is
also on. This means the headlights will stay on for up to
• To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses 90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch to the OFF
and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry position. To turn the automatic headlights off, turn the
cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap headlight switch out of the AUTO position.
solution followed by rinsing.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the head-
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents,
steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the
lenses.
lights will turn on in the Automatic Mode.
3
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: When your headlights come on during the daytime, the instrument panel lights will automatically dim
If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic Headlights, it
to the lower nighttime intensity.
also has this customer-programmable feature. When
your headlights are in the automatic mode and the Automatic High Beam — If Equipped
engine is running, they will automatically turn on when
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
the wiper system is on. This feature is programmable
provides increased forward lighting at night by automatthrough the Uconnect system screen. Refer to “Uconnect
ing high beam control through the use of a digital camera
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
mounted on the inside rearview mirror. This camera
further information.
detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches
If your vehicle is equipped with a “Rain Sensitive Wiper from high beams to low beams until the approaching
System” and it is activated, the headlights will automati- vehicle is out of view.
cally turn on after the wipers complete five wipe cycles
NOTE:
within approximately one minute, and they will turn off
approximately four minutes after the wipers completely • The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be
stop. Refer to “Windshield Wipers And Washers” in this
turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to
section for further information.
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Headlights On Automatically With Wipers
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera
lens will cause the system to function improperly.
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
The Daytime Running Lights (low intensity) come on
whenever the engine is running, and the transmission is
not in the PARK position. The lights will remain on until
the ignition is switched to the OFF or ACC position or the
• To opt out of the Advanced Auto High-Beam Sensitiv- parking brake is engaged.
ity Control (default) and enter Reduced High-Beam NOTE:
Sensitivity Control (not recommended), toggle highbeam lever 6 full on/off cycles within 10 seconds of • If a turn signal is activated, the DRL lamp on the same
side of the vehicle will turn off for the duration of the
ignition ON. System will return to default setting upon
turn signal activation. Once the turn signal is no longer
ignition off.
active, the DRL lamp will illuminate.
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp
Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed • The DRL function may be disabled through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
to ensure proper performance. See your local authorized
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
dealer.
information.
The headlight switch must be used for normal nighttime
driving.
3
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen,
this feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
This feature prevents the headlights from interfering
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
with the vision of oncoming drivers. Headlight leveling
automatically adjusts the height of the headlight beam in If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, this
reaction to changes in vehicle pitch.
feature can be programmed through the Driver Information Display (DID). Refer to “Driver Information Display
Headlight Delay
(DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a further information.
headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for
approximately up to 90 seconds. This delay is initiated Parking Lights And Panel Lights
when the ignition is turned OFF while the headlight
switch is on, and then the headlight switch is cycled off.
To turn on the parking lights and instrument
Headlight delay can be cancelled by either turning the
panel lights, rotate the headlight switch clockwise.
headlight switch on then off, or by turning the ignition To turn off the parking lights, rotate the headlight switch
ON.
back to the O (Off) position.
Automatic Headlight Leveling — HID Headlights
Only
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
An indicator light located in the instrument cluster will
illuminate when the fog lights are on. The fog lights will
The fog lights are turned on by rotating the headlight
turn off when the switch is pushed a second time, when
switch to the parking light or headlight position and
the headlight switch is rotated to the off position, or the
pushing in the headlight rotary control.
high beam is selected.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
Interior Lights
Fog Light Operation
The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights
are on or when the vehicle headlights are on low beam.
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front
doors are opened or when the dimmer control (rotating
wheel on the right side of the headlight switch) is rotated
to its farthest upward position. If your vehicle is
equipped with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) and the
UNLOCK button is pushed on the RKE Key Fob, the
courtesy and dome lights will turn on. When a door is
open and the interior lights are on, rotating the dimmer
control all the way down, to the OFF detent, will cause all
the interior lights to go out. This is also known as the
3
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
“Party” mode because it allows the doors to stay open for
extended periods of time without discharging the vehicle’s battery.
The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be
regulated by rotating the dimmer control up (brighter) or
down (dimmer). When the headlights are on you can
supplement the brightness of the DID, radio and overhead console by rotating the control to its farthest position up until you hear a click. This feature is termed the
“Parade” mode and is useful when headlights are required during the day.
Dimmer Control
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are left on
after the ignition is turned OFF, a chime will sound when
the driver’s door is opened.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
Battery Saver
Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped
To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, load shedding The front map/reading lights are mounted in the overis provided for both the interior and exterior lights.
head console.
If the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for 10
minutes or the dimmer control is rotated all the way up
to the dome ON position for 10 minutes, the interior
lights will automatically turn off.
3
NOTE: Battery saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is
ON.
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled
OFF, the exterior lights will automatically turn off after
eight minutes. If the headlights are turned on and left on
for eight minutes while the ignition is OFF, the exterior
lights will automatically turn off.
Front Map/Reading Lights
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Each light can be turned on by pushing a switch on either
side of the console. These buttons are backlit for night
time visibility. To turn the lights off, push the switch a
second time. The lights will also turn on when the
UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) is
pushed.
Courtesy Lights
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pushing the top
corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, push the lens a
second time.
Courtesy Lights
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
Ambient Light — If Equipped
Multifunction Lever
The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
feature. This light casts illumination for improved visibil- steering column.
ity of the floor and center console area.
Multifunction Lever
Ambient Light
3
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Turn Signals
Flash-To-Pass
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steerproper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights. ing wheel. This will cause the high beam headlights to
turn on until the lever is released.
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside High/Low Beam Switch
light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is panel to switch the headlights to high beams. Pulling the
defective.
multifunction back toward the steering wheel will turn
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
the low beams back on, or shut the high beams off.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
Windshield Wiper Operation
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on the
multifunction lever on the left side of the steering column. The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch,
located on the end of the lever. For information on the
rear wiper/washer, refer to “Rear Window Features” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first four detent
positions for intermittent settings, the fifth detent for low
wiper operation and the sixth detent for high wiper
operation.
Multifunction Lever
Windshield Wiper Operation
3
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
“park” position. If the windshield wiper switch is
turned off, and the blades cannot return to the “park”
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use one of the four intermittent wiper settings when
weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a
variable delay between cycles, desirable. At driving
Intermittent Wiper Operation
speeds above 10 mph (16 km/h), the delay can be
NOTE:
If
the
vehicle is moving less than 10 mph
regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds
(16
km/h),
delay
times will be doubled.
between cycles (first detent), to a cycle every one second
(fourth detent).
Windshield Washer Operation
To use the washer, push on the end of the lever (toward
the steering wheel) and hold while spray is desired. If the
lever is pushed while in the intermittent setting, the
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
wipers will turn on and operate for several wipe cycles If the end of the lever is pushed while the wipers are in
after the end of the lever is released, and then resume the the off position, the wipers will operate for several wipe
intermittent interval previously selected.
cycles, then turn off.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
Mist
Windshield Washer Operation
Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make
occasional usage of the wipers necessary. Rotate the end
of the lever downward to the Mist position and release
for a single wiping cycle.
3
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The
feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings
to activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position one is the least
sensitive, and wiper delay position four is the most
sensitive. Setting three should be used for normal rain
conditions. Settings one and two can be used if the driver
desires less wiper sensitivity. Setting four can be used if
the driver desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch
in the OFF position when not using the system.
Mist Control
NOTE:
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly • Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the windignition is ON, and the automatic transmission is in
the NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will
shield.
not operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle
• Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or silicone
speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the gear
may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
selector is moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
• The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped
using the Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Set- with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are
tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start
further information.
mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the the ignition switch in the RUN position, rain sensing
wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the wiper operation can resume, if it has been selected, and
no other inhibit conditions (mentioned previously) exist.
following conditions:
• Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is
first turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside temperature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
3
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
HEADLIGHT WASHERS — IF EQUIPPED
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
The multifunction lever operates the headlight washers
when the ignition switch is in the ON position and the
headlights are turned on. The multifunction lever is
located on the left side of the steering column.
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is
located below the steering wheel at the end of the
steering column.
To use the headlight washers, push the multifunction
lever inward (toward the steering column) and release it.
The headlight washers will spray a timed high-pressure
spray of washer fluid onto each headlight lens. In addition, the windshield washers will spray the windshield
and the windshield wipers will cycle.
NOTE: After turning the ignition switch and headlights
ON, the headlight washers will operate on the first spray
of the windshield washer and then every eleventh spray
after that.
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
To unlock the steering column, push the lever downward
(toward the floor). To tilt the steering column, move the
steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To
lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering
wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the
steering column in position, push the lever upward until
fully engaged.
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
— IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The power tilt/telescoping
steering column lever is located below the multifunction
lever on the steering column.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
3
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To tilt the steering column, move the lever up or down as
desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull
the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as
desired.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for up
to 80 minutes before automatically shutting off. The
heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn
on when the steering wheel is already warm.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat,
you can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fob
or the memory switch on the driver’s door trim panel to
return the tilt/telescopic steering column to preprogrammed positions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” The heated steering wheel control button is located within
in this section for further information.
the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the control
button through the climate screen or the controls screen.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
turn the heating element ON.
once to
• Press the heated steering wheel button
time to turn the heating element OFF.
a second
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
WARNING! (Continued)
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on
during a remote start through the Uconnect system. Refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise
care when using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods.
(Continued)
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
3
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elecright side of the steering wheel.
tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
1 — On/Off
2 — SET+/Accel
3 — RES/Resume
4 — SET-/Decel
5 — CANC/Cancel
Push the ON/OFF button to activate the electronic speed
control. CRUISE CONTROL READY will appear on the
instrument cluster to indicate the electronic speed control
is on. To turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a
second time. CRUISE CONTROL OFF will appear on the
instrument cluster to indicate the electronic speed control
is off. The system should be turned off when not in use.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-)
button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed. Once a speed has
been set a message CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH
(km/h) will appear indicating what speed was set. A
CRUISE indicator lamp, along with set speed will also
appear and stay on in the instrument cluster when the
speed is set.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed from memory.
Pushing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition
switch OFF erases the set speed from memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the SET + button.
3
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Undercontinue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen To Decrease Speed
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can deU.S. Speed (mph)
crease speed by pushing the SET - button.
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Underbutton results in an increase of 1 mph.
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen
continue to increase until the button is released, then speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
continue to decrease until the button is released, then speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
the new set speed will be established.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
Control.
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
3
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed
the original set speed) automatically to maintain a
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
preset following distance, while matching the speed of
convenience provided by cruise control while traveling
the vehicle ahead.
on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a
safety system and not designed to prevent collisions. The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
Electronic Speed Control function performs differently.
• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an
Please refer to the proper section within this chapter.
appropriate distance between vehicles.
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in
• Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control mode
light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant
for cruising at a constant preset speed. For additional
need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar
information, refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
sensor and a forward facing camera designed to detect a
Control Mode” in this section.
vehicle directly ahead of you.
NOTE: Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control
NOTE:
will not react to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of
• If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you, the mode selected.
ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control
buttons. The two control modes function differently.
Always confirm which mode is selected.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather
conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle
ahead; and, most importantly, brake operation to
ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of
your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
• The ACC system:
• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles,
and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions into account, and may be limited upon
adverse sight distance conditions.
• Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
• Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while
following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle
for 2 seconds in the stop position. If the target
vehicle does not start moving within two seconds
the ACC system will display a message that the
system will release the brakes and that the
(Continued)
(Continued)
WARNING!
3
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
brakes must be applied manually. An audible
chime will sound when the brakes are released.
You should switch off the ACC system:
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e.,
in highway construction zones).
• When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snowcovered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill
slopes.
• When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
• When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
1 — Normal (Fixed Speed)
Cruise Control On/Off
2 — SET+/Accel
3 — RES/Resume
The speed control buttons (located on the right side of the 4 — SET-/Decel
steering wheel) operates the ACC system.
5 — Distance Setting Increase
6 — Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) On/Off
7 — Distance Setting Decrease
8 — CANC/Cancel
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
NOTE: Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications NOTE: You cannot engage ACC under the following
to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive conditions:
Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning System.
• When in Four-Wheel Drive Low.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
• When you apply the brakes.
You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above
• When the parking brake is set.
0 mph (0 km/h).
The minimum Set Speed for the ACC system is 20 mph • When the automatic transmission is in PARK, REVERSE or NEUTRAL.
(32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the READY state, • When the Vehicle speed is outside of the speed range.
the Driver Information Display (DID) displays “ACC • When the brakes are overheated.
Ready.”
• When the driver door is open.
When the system is OFF, the DID displays “Adaptive
• When the driver seat belt is unbuckled.
Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
• ESC Full-Off Mode is active.
3
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To turn the system OFF, push and release the Adaptive
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button again. At this
ON/OFF button. The ACC menu in the DID displays time, the system will turn off and the DID will display
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
“ACC Ready.”
To Activate/Deactivate
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system
on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you
want. You could lose control and have a collision.
Always leave the system off when you are not using
it.
NOTE: ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle
in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do
not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed. If this occurs:
• The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in
the DID.
• The system will not be controlling the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
speed will only be determined by the position of the
SET + button or the SET - button and release. The DID
accelerator pedal.
will display the set speed.
To Cancel
If the system is Set when the vehicle speed is below
20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be defaulted to The following conditions cancel the system:
20 mph (32 km/h). If the system is Set when the vehicle • The brake pedal is applied.
speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be
• The CANCEL button is pushed.
the current speed of the vehicle.
• An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
3
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The gear selector is removed from the Drive position. • The ignition is turned OFF.
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys- • You switch to Four-Wheel Drive Low.
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
To Resume
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
If there is a set speed in memory push the RES (resume)
• Driver seatbelt is unbuckled at low speeds.
• Driver door is opened at low speeds.
• A Trailer Sway Control (TSC) event occurs.
button and then remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal. The DID will display the last set speed.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than two
seconds, then the system will cancel and the brake
The system will turn off and clear the set speed in
force will be ramped-out. The driver will have to apply
memory if:
the brakes to keep the vehicle at a standstill.
To Turn Off
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button • ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle
is pushed.
in-front of your vehicle in close proximity.
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
ON/OFF button is pushed.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed
that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and
road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate
or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by
pushing the SET + button.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the DID.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
3
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will U.S. Speed (mph)
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
in the DID.
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
To Decrease Speed
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the
pushing the SET - button.
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the DID.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under- Metric Speed (km/h)
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen • Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the DID.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
NOTE:
• When you override and push the SET + button or SET
- buttons, the new Set Speed will be the current speed
of the vehicle.
• When you use the SET - button to decelerate, if the
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle
sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system
will automatically slow the vehicle.
• The ACC system applies the brake down to a full stop
when following a target vehicle. If an ACC host vehicle
follows a target vehicle to a standstill, the host vehicle
will release the vehicle brakes two seconds after coming to a full stop.
• The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up
hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting
may occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This is normal operation and necessary to maintain set speed. When driving up hill and down hill, the
ACC system will cancel if the braking temperature
exceeds normal range (overheated).
3
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between four bars (longest),
three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This
distance setting displays in the DID.
Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
3
Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long)
Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium)
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance Setting — Decrease button and release. Each time the button
is pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar
(shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the
set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the
same lane, the DID displays the “Sensed Vehicle Indicator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed automatically to maintain the distance setting, regardless of the set
speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)
• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set
To increase the distance setting, push the Distance Setting
speed.
— Increase button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar (longer). • The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of
the sensor.
• The distance setting is changed.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
• The system disengages. (Refer to the information on
ACC Activation).
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; however, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
necessary.
NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
ACC system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to
maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert
“BRAKE” will flash in the DID and a chime will sound
Brake Alert
while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
NOTE:
The
“Brake!”
Screen
in the DID is a warning for
capacity.
the driver to take action and does not necessarily mean
that the Forward Collision Warning system is applying
the brakes autonomously.
3
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
A cancel message will display on the DID and produce a
warning chime. Driver intervention will be required at
When driving with ACC engaged and following a vethis moment.
hicle, the system will provide an additional acceleration
up to the ACC set speed to assist in passing the vehicle. While ACC with Stop is holding your vehicle at a
This additional acceleration is triggered when the driver standstill, if the driver seatbelt is unbuckled or the driver
utilizes the left turn signal and will only be active when door is opened, the ACC with Stop system will cancel
and the brakes will release. A cancel message will display
passing on the left hand side.
on the DID and produce a warning chime. Driver interACC Operation At Stop
vention will be required at this moment.
If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a standstill
while following a target vehicle, if the target vehicle starts
WARNING!
moving within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a
standstill, your vehicle will resume motion without the When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must
ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or
need for any driver action.
objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow
If the target vehicle does not start moving within two these warnings can result in a collision and death or
seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the ACC serious personal injury.
with Stop system will cancel and the brakes will release.
Overtake Aid
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering
wheel) and the following will display in the DID:
The DID displays the current ACC system settings. The
DID is located in the center of the instrument cluster. The ACC SET
information it displays depends on ACC system status.
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
Push the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/ instrument cluster.
OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
the following displays in the DID:
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
• System Cancel
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adap• Driver Override
tive Cruise Control Off.”
• System Off
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has • ACC Proximity Warning
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise • ACC Unavailable Warning
Control Ready.”
• The DID will return to the last display selected after
five seconds of no ACC display activity
3
210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
Warning
vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when
the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path
this warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning will display and also a chime will indicate when Sensor” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control is still available. For additional information refer
conditions temporarily limit system performance.
to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as section.
in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud,
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
dirt or ice. In these cases, the DID will display “ACC/
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” and the
vehicle behind the lower grille.
system will deactivate.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is imporThe “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
tant to note the following maintenance items:
message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or • Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
ice and snow). The ACC system will recover after the
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage
the sensor lens.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
• Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so NOTE:
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and
• If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
require a sensor realignment.
Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than
• If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due
once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
to a collision, see your authorized dealer for service.
other obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at
your authorized dealer.
• Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor,
including transparent material or aftermarket grilles. • Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an afterDoing so could cause an ACC system failure or
market grille or modifying the grille is not recommalfunction.
mended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit
ACC/FCW operation.
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive “Clean Front Windshield” Warning
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
simply reactivating it.
Windshield” warning will display and also a chime will
indicate when conditions temporarily limit system performance. This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC
system may also become temporarily blinded due to
3
212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and
fog on the inside of glass. In these cases, the DID will
display “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” and the system will have degraded performance.
When the condition that created limited functionality is
no longer present, the system will return to full functionality.
NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
Windshield” message can sometimes be displayed while other obstruction, have the windshield and forward
driving in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW facing camera inspected at your authorized dealer.
system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas.
Service ACC/FCW Warning
Under rare conditions, when the camera is not tracking
any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may If the system turns off, and the DID displays “ACC/FCW
Unavailable Service Required” or “Cruise/FCW Unavailtemporarily occur.
able Service Required”, there may be an internal system
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should fault or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC funcexamine the windshield and the camera located on the tionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under
back side of the inside rear view mirror. They may normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable.
require cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
If this occurs, try activating ACC again later, following an
ignition cycle. If the problem persists, see your authorized dealer.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to
intervene.
Towing A Trailer
Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is
offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging
Offset Driving Condition Example
in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance
Turns
And
Bends
to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and
out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for
stability reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once
3
214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
the vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume Using ACC On Hills
your original Set Speed. This is a part of normal ACC When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in
system functionality.
your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
NOTE: On tight turns ACC performance may be limited. conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be limited.
Turn Or Bend Example
ACC Hill Example
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215
Lane Changing
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and
it may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC
system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until
it is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
3
Lane Changing Example
216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Narrow Vehicles
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they
have moved fully into the lane. There may not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations
where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and
the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be
attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Narrow Vehicle Example
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217
General Information
Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency Mode
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a Normal
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control mode is available
for cruising at fixed speeds. The Normal (Fixed Speed)
Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
Electronic Speed Control mode is designed to maintain a
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
the accelerator. Electronic Speed Control can only be
operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h).
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op- To change between the different control modes, push the
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF button
eration of the device.
which turns the ACC and the NORMAL (Fixed Speed)
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL OFF. Pushing of the
other than an authorized service facility could void
NORMAL (Fixed Speed) ELECTRONIC SPEED CONauthorization to use this equipment.
TROL ON/OFF button will result in turning ON (changing to) the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control mode.
3
218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
In the normal Cruise Control mode, the system will
not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity
warning does not activate and no alarm will sound
even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since
neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is
selected.
Once a speed has been set a message (CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH/KM) will appear indicating what
speed was set. This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is SET.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the SET +
button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of
Speed Control ON. When the vehicle has U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
reached the desired speed, push the SET (+) or
SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
To Set A Desired Speed
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219
U.S. Speed (mph)
To Decrease Speed
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set,
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the you can decrease speed by pushing the SET - button.
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Undercontinue to increase in 5 mph increments until the standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected The speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed
in the DID display.
of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
Metric Speed (km/h)
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h • Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is rebutton is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the DID display.
flected in the DID display.
3
220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Metric Speed (km/h)
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h • The braking temperature exceeds normal range (overheated).
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• The gear selector is removed from the Drive position.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
To Resume Speed
continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is re- To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
flected in the DID display.
20 mph (32 km/h).
To Cancel
To Turn Off
The following conditions will cancel the Normal (Fixed
Speed) Electronic Speed Control without clearing the The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
memory if:
memory:
• The brake pedal is applied.
• The CANCEL button is pushed.
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
ON/OFF button is pushed.
• The ignition is turned off.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221
• You engage Four-Wheel Drive Low.
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off button is
pushed.
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH
MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation
Operation
NOTE: FCW monitors the information from the forward
looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller
(EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision.
When the system determines that a forward collision is
probable, the driver will be provided with audible and
visual warnings and may provide a brake jerk warning. If
the driver does not take action based upon these progressive warnings, then the system will provide a limited
level of active braking to help slow the vehicle and
mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver
reacts to the warnings by braking and the system determines that the driver intends to avoid the collision by
braking but has not applied sufficient brake force, the
system will compensate and provide additional brake
force as required.
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system with
mitigation provides the driver with audible warnings,
visual warnings (within the DID), and may apply a brake
jerk to warn the driver when it detects a potential frontal
collision. The warnings and limited braking are intended
to provide the driver with enough time to react, avoid or
mitigate the potential collision.
If a Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event
begins at a speed below 26 mph (42 km/h), the system
may provide the maximum or partial braking to mitigate
the potential forward collision. If the Forward Collision
3
222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Warning with Mitigation event stops the vehicle com- NOTE:
pletely, the system will hold the vehicle at a standstill for
• The minimum speed for FCW activation is 1 mph
two seconds and then release the brakes.
(2 km/h).
• The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than
vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the
course prediction. This is expected and is a part of
normal FCW activation and functionality.
• It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such
misuse of the system, after four Active Braking events
within an ignition cycle, the Active Braking portion of
FCW will be deactivated until the next ignition cycle.
• The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If
the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should
FCW Message
be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the
surroundings. If the vehicle enters 4WD Low Range or
When the system determines a collision with the vehicle
ESC Full-Off Mode is active, the FCW system will be
in front of you is no longer probable, the warning
automatically deactivated.
message will be deactivated.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect
every type of potential collision. The driver has the
responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the
vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow
this warning could lead to serious injury or death.
Turning FCW ON Or OFF
To turn the FCW system back ON, press the forward
collision button again to turn the system ON.
Changing the FCW status to “OFF” prevents the system
from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle
in front of you.
NOTE: The FCW system state is kept in memory from
one ignition cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF,
it will remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
Changing FCW And Active Braking Status
NOTE: The default status of FCW is “On”, this allows
The FCW Sensitivity And Active Braking Settings are
the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
programmable through the Uconnect System. Refer to
vehicle in front of you.
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
The forward collision button is located in the Uconnect Panel” for further information.
display in the controls settings.
The default status of FCW is the “Medium” setting and
To turn the FCW system OFF, press the forward collision the Active Braking is in the “On” setting. This allows the
button once to turn the system OFF.
3
224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
system to warn the driver of a possible collision with the Changing the Active Braking status to “Off” prevents the
vehicle in front using audible/visual warnings and it system from providing autonomous braking, or additional brake support if the driver is not braking adapplies autonomous braking.
equately in the event of a potential frontal collision.
Changing the FCW status to “Far” setting allows the
system to warn the driver of a possible collision with the NOTE:
vehicle in front using audible/visual warning when the
• The system will retain the last setting selected by the
latter is at a farther distance than ⬙Medium⬙ setting. This
driver after ignition shut down.
provides the most reaction time to avoid a possible
collision.
• FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as
overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in the
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows
path of the vehicle, stationary objects that are far away,
the system to warn the driver of a possible collision with
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or
the vehicle in front when the distance between the
higher rate of speed.
vehicle in the front is much closer. This setting provides
less reaction time than the “Far” and “Medium” settings, • FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable
which allows for a more dynamic driving experience.
screens.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225
FCW Limited Warning
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
If the DID displays “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality” EQUIPPED
or “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind- The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual
shield” momentarily, there may be a condition that limits and audible indications of the distance between the rear
FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.
under normal conditions, the active braking may not be during a parking maneuver. If your vehicle is equipped
fully available. Once the condition that limited the sys- with an Automatic Transmission, the vehicle brakes may
tem performance is no longer present, the system will be automatically applied and released when performing
return to its full performance state. If the problem per- a reverse parking maneuver if the system detects a
possible collision with an obstacle.
sists, see your authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
NOTE:
If the system turns off, and the DID displays:
• The driver can override the automatic braking function by pressing the gas pedal, turning ParkSense off
via ParkSense switch, or changing the gear while the
automatic brakes are being applied.
• ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
• Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although • Automatic brakes will not be available if ESC is not
the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have
available.
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
3
226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Automatic brakes will not be available if there is a The automatic braking function is intended to assist the
faulted condition detected with the ParkSense Park driver in avoiding possible collisions with detected obstacles when backing up in REVERSE gear.
Assist system or the Braking System Module.
• The automatic braking function may only be applied if NOTE:
the vehicle deceleration is not enough to avoid collid• The driver is always responsible for controlling the
ing with a detected obstacle.
vehicle.
• The automatic braking function may not be applied
• The system is provided to assist the driver and not to
fast enough for obstacles that move toward the rear of
substitute the driver.
the vehicle from the left and/or right sides.
• The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle’s
• The automatic braking function can be enabled/
acceleration and braking and is responsible for the
disabled from the Customer-Programmable Features
vehicle’s movements.
section of the Uconnect System.
Refer to ParkSense System Usage Precautions for limita• ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
tions of this system and recommendations.
for the automatic braking function through ignition
cycles.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled at this gear selector
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
above. When in REVERSE and above the system’s operating speed, a warning will appear within the Driver
Information Display (DID) indicating the vehicle speed is
too fast. The system will become active again if the
vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
ParkSense Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
ParkSense Warning Display
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer Programmable Features section of the Uconnect System.
Refer to ⬙Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the DID.
It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance
between the rear fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)” for
further information.
3
228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
When the vehicle is in REVERSE and an obstacle has a single arc in the left and/or right rear regions based on
been detected, the warning display will turn ON indicat- the obstacle’s distance and location relative to the vehicle.
ing the system status.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single arc in the left
and/or right rear region and the system will produce a
tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the tone will change from a single 1/2 second
tone to slow, to fast, to continuous.
ParkSense Display
Park Assist Ready
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229
3
Single 1/2 Second Tone
Slow Tone
230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Slow Tone
Fast Tone
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231
3
Fast Tone
Continuous Tone
232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Audible
Alert
Chime
Arcs-Left
Arcs-Center
Greater
than
79 in
(200 cm)
None
79-59 in
(150-100
cm)
WARNING ALERTS
59-47 in
47-39 in
(150-120
(120-100
cm)
cm)
39-25 in
(100-65 cm)
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 in
(30 cm)
Slow
Slow
Fast
Fast
Continuous
None
Single 1/2
Second
Tone
None
None
None
None
None
6th Solid
5th Solid
4th Solid
3rd
Flashing
2nd
Flashing
2nd
Flashing
1st
Flashing
1st
Flashing
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233
Arcs-Right
None
None
None
None
None
Radio Volume Reduced
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2nd
Flashing
Yes
1st
Flashing
Yes
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the
ParkSense switch.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disRear chime volume settings can be selected from the
able the system, the instrument cluster will
Customer-Programmable Features section of the
display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for
Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Unapproximately five seconds. Refer to “Driver
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informaInformation Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your
tion.
Instrument Panel” for further information. When the
The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and
gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system is
HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.
disabled, the DID will display the “PARKSENSE OFF”
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
through ignition cycles.
3
234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The ParkSense switch LED will be ON when ParkSense is
disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED
will be OFF when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense
switch is pushed, and the system requires service, the
ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily, and then
the LED will be ON.
REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted condition, the DID will display the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙ or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message for as long
as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition,
ParkSense will not operate.
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” appears in the Driver Information Display (DID)
make sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear
fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt
or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the
message continues to appear, see an authorized dealer.
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense Rear Park
Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the
instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per
ignition cycle, and it will display the “PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or the
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
message. Refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)” for appears in the DID, see an authorized dealer.
further information. When the gear selector is moved to
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235
• When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense is turned OFF, the DID will
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap
display “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
vehicle is in REVERSE.
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not
NOTE:
to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly.
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
affect the performance of ParkSense.
bumper.
• When you turn ParkSense OFF, the instrument cluster
will display “PARKSENSE OFF” Furthermore, once
you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it
on again, even if you cycle the ignition.
Cleaning The ParkSense System
3
236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system
OFF if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches,
etc. are placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear
fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the
system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor
problem, causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the
DID.
• ParkSense should be disabled when the liftgate is in
the open position and the vehicle is in REVERSE. An
open liftgate could provide a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237
CAUTION!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when
an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED
up or moving forward, e.g. during a parking maneuver.
If your vehicle is equipped with an Automatic Transmission, the vehicle brakes may be automatically applied
and released when performing a reverse parking maneuver if the system detects a possible collision with an
obstacle.
NOTE:
• The driver can override the automatic braking function by pressing the gas pedal, turning ParkSense off
via ParkSense switch, or changing the gear while the
automatic brakes are being applied.
• Automatic brakes will not be available if ESC is not
available.
• Automatic brakes will not be available if there is a
faulted condition detected with the ParkSense Park
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and
Assist system or the Braking System Module.
audible indications of the distance between the rear
and/or front fascia and a detected obstacle when backing
3
238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The automatic braking function may only be applied if NOTE:
the vehicle deceleration is not enough to avoid collid• The driver is always responsible for controlling the
ing with a detected obstacle.
vehicle.
• The automatic braking function will not be available if
• The system is provided to assist the driver and not to
vehicle is in 4LO transfer case mode.
substitute the driver.
• The automatic braking function may not be applied
• The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle’s
fast enough for obstacles that move toward the rear of
acceleration and braking and is responsible for the
the vehicle from the left and/or right sides.
vehicle’s movements.
• The automatic braking function can be enabled/
Refer to ParkSense System Usage Precautions for limitadisabled from the Customer-Programmable Features
tions of this system and recommendations.
section of the Uconnect System.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
• ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
for the automatic braking function through ignition
changed to the ON/RUN position.
cycles.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
The automatic braking function is intended to assist the
REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is enabled at one of
driver in avoiding possible collisions with detected obthese gear selector positions, the system will remain
stacles when backing up in REVERSE gear.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239
active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. A display warning
will appear in the Driver Information Display (DID)
indicating the vehicle is above ParkSense operating
speed. The system will become active again if the vehicle
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately
6 mph (9 km/h).
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 47 in
(120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
ParkSense Warning Display
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer ParkSense Sensors
Programmable Features section of the Uconnect System.
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/ Refer to ⬙Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is Instrument Panel” for further information.
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in
Driver Information Display (DID). It provides visual
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
warnings to indicate the distance between the rear
direction, depending on the location, type and orientafascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper and the detion of the obstacle.
tected obstacle. Refer to “Driver Information Display
The six ParkSense sensors, located in the front fascia/ (DID)” for further information.
bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
3
240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
When the vehicle is in REVERSE and an obstacle has a single arc in the left and/or right rear regions based on
been detected, the warning display will turn ON indicat- the object’s distance and location relative to the vehicle.
ing the system status.
If an object is detected in the left and/or right rear region,
the display will show a single arc in the left and/or right
rear region and the system will produce a tone. As the
vehicle moves closer to the object, the display will show
the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone
will change from a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to fast,
to continuous.
ParkSense Display
Park Assist Ready
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241
3
Single 1/2 Second Tone
Slow Tone
242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Slow Tone For Rear Only
Fast Tone For Rear Only
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243
3
Fast Tone
Continuous Tone
244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the DID display
shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone.
The following chart shows the warning alert operation
when the system is detecting an obstacle:
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Audible
Alert
Chime
Arcs-Left
Arcs-Center
Greater
than
79 in
(200 cm)
None
79-59 in
(150-100
cm)
WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR
59-47 in
47-39 in
39-25 in
(150-120
(120-100
(100-65 cm)
cm)
cm)
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 in
(30 cm)
Slow
Slow
Fast
Fast
Continuous
None
Single 1/2
Second
Tone
None
None
None
None
None
6th Solid
5th Solid
4th Solid
3rd
Flashing
2nd
Flashing
2nd
Flashing
1st
Flashing
1st
Flashing
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245
Arcs-Right
None
None
None
None
None
Radio Volume Reduced
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Front Distance
(in/cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
Arcs-Left
Arcs-Center
Arcs-Right
Radio Volume
Reduced
2nd
Flashing
Yes
1st
Flashing
Yes
3
Greater than
47 in (120 cm)
None
None
None
None
No
WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT
47-39 in
39-25 in
(120-100 cm)
(100-65 cm)
None
None
None
4th Solid
None
No
None
3rd Flashing
None
No
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Fast
Less than 12 in
(30 cm)
Continuous
2nd Flashing
2nd Flashing
2nd Flashing
Yes
1st Flashing
1st Flashing
1st Flashing
Yes
246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the
ParkSense switch.
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the system, the instrument cluster will
display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for
approximately five seconds. Refer to “Driver
Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
Instrument Panel” for further information. When the
Front and Rear chime volume settings can be selected gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system is
from the Uconnect System. Refer to ⬙Uconnect Settings” disabled, the DID will display the “PARKSENSE OFF”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
information.
The ParkSense switch LED will be ON when ParkSense is
The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED
HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM. will be OFF when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state switch is pushed, and the system requires service, the
ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily, and then
through ignition cycles.
the LED will be ON.
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible alert
(chime) after approximately 3 seconds when an obstacle
has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and brake
pedal is applied.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247
Service The ParkSense Park Assist System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense System has
detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster will
actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will
display the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS⬙, or the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message for five seconds.
When the gear selector is moved to Reverse and the
system has detected a faulted condition, the Driver
Information Display (DID) will display a ⬙PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS⬙ or
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙
pop up message for five seconds. After five seconds, a
vehicle graphic will be displayed with ⬙UNAVAILABLE⬙
at either the front or rear sensor location depending on
where the fault is detected. The system will continue to
provide arc alerts for the side that is functioning properly.
These arc alerts will interrupt the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS⬙, or ⬙PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ messages if an
object is detected within the five second pop-up duration.
The vehicle graphic will remain displayed for as long as
the vehicle is in REVERSE. Refer to “Driver Information
Display (DID)” for further information.
If ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙
or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS⬙ appears in the Driver Information Display (DID)
make sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear
fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and
clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then
cycle the ignition. If the message continues to appear see
an authorized dealer.
If the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message appears in the DID, see an authorized
dealer.
3
248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap
cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF” for as long as
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
the vehicle is in REVERSE.
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not
NOTE:
to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
• Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free of snow,
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
operating properly.
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
affect the performance of ParkSense.
behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
• When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster
will display “PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore, once • Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system
off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc.
you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it
are placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear fascia/
on again, even if you cycle the ignition.
bumper. Failure to do so can result in the system
Cleaning The ParkSense System
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249
misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem,
causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the instrument cluster.
• ParkSense should be disabled when the liftgate is in
the open position. An opened liftgate could provide a
false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
(Continued)
3
250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
on the Navigation/Multimedia radio display screen along
with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across
the top of the screen. After five seconds this note will
disappear. The ParkView camera is located on the rear of
the vehicle above the rear License plate.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and
the navigation or audio screen appears again.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid
lines will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting
out of ⬙REVERSE⬙ unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into
⬙PARK⬙ or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image
of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear
selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed
NOTE: The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has programmable modes of operation that may be selected through the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the hitch/receiver. ⬙Different colored zones indicate the disimage to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its tance to the rear of the vehicle.⬙ The following table
projected backup path based on the steering wheel shows the approximate distances for each zone:
position. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center
of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a
Zone
Red
Yellow
Green
Distance to the rear of the vehicle
0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
(Continued)
3
252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/her
shoulder when using ParkView.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights
and storage for sunglasses. Universal Garage Door
Opener (HomeLink), power liftgate and power sunroof
switches may also be included, if equipped.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water,
and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
Overhead Console
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253
To turn the lights off, push the switch a second time. The
Lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each light lights also turn on when a door is opened. The lights will
can be turned on by pushing the switch on either side of also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE is
pushed.
the console. These buttons are backlit for night time
visibility.
Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
Front Map/Reading Lights
3
254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Courtesy Lights
Sunglasses Bin Door
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pushing the top At the front of the console a compartment is provided for
corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, push the lens a the storage of a pair of sunglasses. The storage compartsecond time.
ment access is a “push/push” design. Push the chrome
pad on the door to open. Push the chrome pad on the
door to close.
Courtesy Lights
Sunglasses Bin Door
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink replaces up to three hand-held transmitters
that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt
battery.
3
The HomeLink buttons, located on the overhead console,
designate the three different HomeLink channels. The
HomeLink indicator is located above the center button.
HomeLink Buttons/Overhead Console
NOTE: HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Security
Alarm is active.
256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink
NOTE:
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage • Erasing all channels should only be performed when
before you begin programming.
programming HomeLink for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal, it is recommended • If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
of the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
system.
Programming A Rolling Code
To erase the channels, place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink For programming garage door openers that were manubuttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red factured after 1995:
indicator flashes.
These garage door openers can be identified by the
“LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where the hanging
antenna is attached to the garage door opener. It is NOT
the button that is normally used to open and close the
door. The name and color of the button may vary by
manufacturer.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8
cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light
in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held
transmitter button.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
3
258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some garage door openers/devices
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
(Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next 1.
step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
2.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
3.
activates, programming is complete.
Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
Without releasing the button, proceed with “Programming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all
remaining steps.
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not activate, push the button a third time (for two seconds) to
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
complete the training.
To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the before 1995:
channels.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8
cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light
in view.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
3. Push and hold the Homelink button you want to (Non-Rolling Code)
program while you push and hold the hand-held To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
transmitter button.
follow these steps:
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi- 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
cator light. The Homelink indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the 2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Rerelease the button.
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with “Pro5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button
and observe the indicator light.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
gramming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all
remaining steps.
3
260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8
cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
in view.
several seconds of transmission:
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig- 3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink button
while you push and release (“cycle”) your hand-held
nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transtransmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has
mission, which may not be long enough for HomeLink to
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indipick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
fully trained.
time-out in the same manner.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling 4. Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage
door or gate motor.
door may open and close while you are programming.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button
and observe the indicator light.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261
NOTE:
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and
follow all remaining steps.
Using HomeLink
To operate, push and release the programmed HomeLink
button. Activation will now occur for the programmed
device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.) The
programming, plug it back in at this time.
hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at
any time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
Security
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
follow these steps:
in your vehicle.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20
seconds until the red indicator flashes.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not NOTE: All channels will be erased. Individual channels
release the button.
cannot be erased.
3
262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink, here
are some of the most common solutions:
• Replace the battery in the Garage Door Opener handheld transmitter.
• Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
• Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
WARNING!
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas
can cause serious injury or death.
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people,
pets or other objects are in the path of the door or
gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This includes
most garage door opener models manufactured
after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without
these safety features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515
or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety
information or assistance.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
3
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
Power Sunroof Switch
WARNING!
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the
Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
(Continued)
264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly
unattended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Opening Sunroof — Express
Push the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will open automatically from any
position. The sunroof will open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Open”. During Express
Open operation, any other actuation of the sunroof
switch will stop the sunroof.
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch rearward
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a
partially opened condition until the sunroof switch is
pushed again.
Closing Sunroof — Express
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automati- NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result
cally. This is called “Express Close”. During Express in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and
Close operation, any other actuation of the switch will the sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode.
stop the sunroof.
Venting Sunroof — Express
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
Push and release the Vent button within one half second
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
closed condition until the sunroof switch is pushed again.
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
called “Express Vent” and it will occur regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Pinch Protect Feature
Sunshade Operation
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs.
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
3
266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Wind Buffeting
Ignition Off Operation
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of NOTE:
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
• The power sunroof switch can remain active in Accesears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
sory Delay for up to approximately ten minutes after
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
the vehicles ignition is placed to the Off position.
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurOpening either front door will cancel this feature.
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows • This feature is programmable using the Uconnect
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understandwith the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Relearn Procedure
Sunroof Maintenance
For vehicles equipped with a single-pane sunroof, there
Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean is a relearn procedure that allows you to calibrate the
the glass panel.
sunroof when the “Auto Up” feature stops working. To
reset the sunroof, follow these steps:
1. Set the ignition to the ACC ON/RUN position.
2. Ensure that the sunroof is in the Fully Closed position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267
3. Push and hold the Close switch. The sunroof will hit The power shade switch is located to the right between
the hard stop and move to the Vent position after 10 the sun visors on the overhead console.
seconds.
4. Release the Close switch, then push and hold the
Close switch again within 5 seconds to begin the
teaching process. The sunroof will complete one full
cycle and return to the Fully Closed position.
3
NOTE: If the Close switch is released anytime during the
teach cycle, the procedure will need to be repeated
starting from the first step.
5. Once the sunroof has stopped in the Fully Closed
position, release the Close switch. The sunroof is now
reset and ready to use.
COMMANDVIEW SUNROOF WITH POWER
SHADE — IF EQUIPPED
The CommandView sunroof switch is located to the left
between the sun visors on the overhead console.
CommandView Sunroof And Power Shade Switches
268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the
Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly
unattended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
(Continued)
Opening Sunroof — Express
Push the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automatically from any position. The sunroof and sunshade will
open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express
Open.” During Express Open operation, any other actuation of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch rearward to
full open. Any release of the switch will stop the movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a partially
opened condition until the sunroof switch is pushed again.
Opening Power Shade — Express
Push the shade switch rearward and release it within
one-half second and the shade will open automatically
from any position. The shade will open and stop automatically at the half-open position. Push the shade switch
rearward again and release it within one-half second and
Closing Sunroof — Express
the shade will open automatically to the full-open posiPush the switch forward and release it within one-half tion. This is called “Express Open”. During Express Open
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any operation, any movement of the shade switch will stop
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automati- the shade.
cally. This is called “Express Close.” During Express
Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode
Close operation, any other actuation of the switch will
To open the shade, push and hold the switch rearward.
stop the sunroof.
The shade will open and stop automatically at the
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
half-open position. Push and hold the shade switch
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in the rearward again and the shade will open automatically to
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the the full-open position. Any release of the switch will stop
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially the movement and the shade will remain in a partially
closed condition until the sunroof switch is pushed again. opened condition until the switch is pushed again.
3
270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Closing Power Shade — Express
Venting Sunroof — Express
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the shade will close automatically from any
position. If the sunroof is completely closed the shade
will close fully and stop automatically. This is called
“Express Close”. During Express Close operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the shade.
Push and release the ⬙Vent⬙ button within one-half second and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This
is called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
To close the shade, push and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the shade will remain in a partially closed
condition until the switch is pushed again.
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs.
NOTE: If the sunshade is in the closed position when the
NOTE: If the sunroof is open, the shade will close to the vent switch is pushed, the sunshade will automatically
half-open position. Pushing the shade close button again cycle to the halfway open position prior to the sunroof
will automatically close both the sunroof and shade opening to the Vent position.
completely.
Pinch Protect Feature
Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result Ignition Off Operation
in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and
NOTE:
the sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode.
• The power sunroof switch can remain active in AccesWind Buffeting
sory Delay for up to approximately ten minutes after
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
the vehicles ignition is placed to the Off position.
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain • This feature is programmable using the Uconnect
System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understandopen or partially open positions. This is a normal occuring Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp) power
outlets that can be used to power cellular phones, small
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
electronics and other low powered electrical accessories.
Sunroof Maintenance
The power outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean “battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered.
Power outlets labeled with a “key” are powered when
the glass panel.
3
272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
the ignition is in the ON or ACC position, while the The front power outlet is located inside the storage area
outlets labeled with a “battery” are connected directly to on the center stack of the instrument panel. Push inward
the battery and powered at all times.
on the storage lid to open the compartment and gain
access to this power outlet.
NOTE:
• All accessories connected to the “battery” powered
outlets should be removed or turned off when the
vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against
discharge.
• To ensure proper cigar lighter operation, a MOPAR
knob and element must be used.
CAUTION!
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as
this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse.
Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage
not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Front Power Outlet
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273
In addition to the front power outlet, there is also a power The rear power outlet is located in the right rear cargo
outlet located in the storage area of the center console.
area.
3
Center Console Outlet
Rear Power Outlet
274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The rear power outlet can be switched from
switched “ignition” only to constant “battery” powered
all the time. See your local authorized dealer for details.
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
Power Outlet Right Rear Quarter Panel Fuse
1 — F104 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet Console Bin
2 — F90–F91 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet Right Rear Quarter Panel
3 — F93 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275
WARNING!
CAUTION!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
3
276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet located on the
back of the center console to convert DC current to AC
current. This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics and other low power devices requiring power up to
150 Watts. Certain high-end video games consoles will
exceed this power limit, as will most new computers and
power tools.
Power Inverter
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload CUPHOLDERS
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded, There are two cupholders for the front seat passengers
the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once located in the center console.
the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset. To avoid overloading
the circuit, check the power ratings on electrical devices
prior to using the inverter.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
Front Cupholders
3
278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
There are two cupholders for the rear seat passengers STORAGE
located in the fold-down center armrest.
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the right side of the
instrument panel.
Rear Cupholders
Glove Compartment
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 279
To open the glove compartment, pull outward on the Door Storage
latch and lower the glove compartment door.
Large storage areas are built into the door panels for easy
access.
3
Opened Glove Compartment
Door Panel Storage
280 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To open the upper storage compartment, pull upward on
The center console contains both an upper and a lower the small latch located on the lid.
storage area.
Console Features
Storage Compartment Latches
Storage Compartment
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 281
Lift upward on the larger of the latches to access the Your vehicle may have an optional CD or DVD player
lower storage compartment.
located in the center console.
3
Lower Storage Compartment
Lower Storage Compartment CD/DVD Player — If
Equipped
282 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Driving with the
console compartment lid open may result in injury in
a collision.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Rechargeable Flashlight
The rechargeable flashlight is mounted on the left side of
the cargo area. The flashlight snaps out of the bezel when
needed. The flashlight features two bright LED light
bulbs and is powered by rechargeable lithium batteries
that recharge when snapped back into place.
Push in on the flashlight to release it.
Push And Release
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 283
To operate the flashlight, push the switch once for high, NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a rear subwoofer, the passenger side cargo area will not be availtwice for low, and a third time to return to off.
able.
3
Three-Push Switch
Cargo Storage Bins
There are up to four removable storage bins located in the
rear cargo area. There are two storage bins located on
either side of the cargo area.
Rear Storage Bin
284 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Two additional storage bins are located under the load
floor. To access the lower storage bins, raise the load floor
and attach the tether hook (attached to the bottom of the
load floor) to the liftgate opening.
Lower Storage Bins
Tether Strap
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 285
Retractable Cargo Area Cover — If Equipped
NOTE: The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to
secure loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting or
protect passengers from loose cargo.
3
To cover the cargo area:
1. Grasp the cover at the center handle. Pull it over the
cargo area.
2. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the slots in
the pillar trim cover.
3. The liftgate may be opened with the cargo cover in
place.
Rear Cargo Cover
286 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
In a collision, a loose cargo cover in the vehicle could
cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden stop and
strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store the cargo
cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compartment. Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken
from its mounting. Do not store it in the vehicle.
Rear Cargo Tie-Downs
The rear cargo tie-downs, located on the cargo area floor,
should be used to safely secure loads when the vehicle is
moving.
Rear Cargo Tie-Downs
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 287
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats
and use seat belts.
• Cargo tie-down hooks are not safe anchors for a
child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or accident,
a hook could pull loose and allow the child seat to
come loose. A child could be badly injured. Use
only the anchors provided for child seat tethers.
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your
vehicle:
• Do not carry loads which exceed the load limits
described on the label attached to the left door or
left door center pillar.
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of
the vehicle to sway.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
accident.
(Continued)
3
288 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to
the first detent for intermittent operation and to
the second detent for continuous rear wiper operation.
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on the mulRotating the center portion upward once more
tifunction lever on the left side of the steering column.
will activate the washer pump which will conThe rear wiper/washer is operated by rotating a switch,
tinue to operate as long as the switch is held. Upon
located at the middle of the lever.
release of the switch, the wipers will resume the continuous rear wiper operation. When this rotary control is in
the OFF position, rotating it downward will activate the
rear washer pump which will continue to operate as long
as the switch is held. Once the switch is released it will
return to the OFF position and the wipers will cycle
several times before returning to the parked position.
NOTE: As a protective measure, the pump will stop if the
switch is held for more than 20 seconds. Once the switch
is released the pump will resume normal operation.
Rear Wiper/Washer Control
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 289
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned
OFF, the wiper will automatically return to the “park”
position.
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on
the climate control panel. Push this button to turn
on the rear window defroster and the heated outside
mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button will
illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The
rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of
operation, push the button a second time.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
3
290 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MOPAR crossbars. Then, move the crossbar to the desired position, keeping the crossbars parallel to the rack
The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry the
frame. Once the crossbar is in the desired position,
weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The
retighten the with the wrench to lock the crossbar into
load must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be
position.
uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.
NOTE:
NOTE: If not equipped with crossbars, your authorized
dealer can order and install MOPAR crossbars built • To help control wind noise when the crossbars are not
specifically for this roof rack system.
in use, place the front and rear crossbars approximately 24 in (61 cm) apart. Optimal noise reduction
Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack crossbars.
can then be achieved by adjusting the front crossbar
The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying
forward or aft using increments of 1 in (2.5 cm).
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo
inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not • If (or any metallic object) is placed over the satellite
exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
radio antenna (if equipped), you may experience interruption of satellite radio reception. For improved
To move the crossbars, loosen the attachments, located at
satellite radio reception, avoid placing the rear crossthe upper edge of each crossbar, approximately eight
bar over the satellite radio antenna.
turns using the anti-theft wrench provided with the
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 291
WARNING!
CAUTION! (Continued)
Cargo must be securely tied before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack
cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
CAUTION!
• To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, do
not carry any loads on the roof rack without the
crossbars installed. The load should be secured and
placed on top of the crossbars, not directly on the
roof. If it is necessary to place the load on the roof,
place a blanket or some other protection between
the load and the roof surface.
(Continued)
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do
not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of
150 lb (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as
evenly as possible and secure the load appropriately.
• Long loads which extend over the windshield, such
as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with large
frontal area should be secured to both the front and
rear of the vehicle.
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof
rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby
truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift to a load.
This is especially true on large flat loads and may
result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
3
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .297
▫ Engine Oil Life Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
▫ DID Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
䡵 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS . . . . . . .300
▫ DID Selectable Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
▫ Red Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
▫ Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items . . . . . . . .346
▫ Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .313
▫ Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode
Message — Electrical Load Reduction Actions —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
▫ Green Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .326
▫ Blue Telltale Indicator Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
▫ White Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .331
䡵 DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID). . . . . .335
▫ DID Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
䡵 CYBERSECURITY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
䡵 UCONNECT SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
▫ Buttons On The Faceplate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
4
294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Buttons On The Touchscreen. . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
▫ Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 5.0 Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . .354
▫ Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 8.4 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
䡵 UCONNECT RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .394
䡵 iPod/USB/MP3 CONTROL —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
䡵 UCONNECT REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT
(RSE) SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . .395
▫ Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
▫ Dual Video Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
▫ Play A DVD/Blu-ray Disc Using The
Touchscreen Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
▫ Important Notes For Dual Video Screen
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
▫ Blu-ray Disc Player Remote Control —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
▫ Replacing The Remote Control Batteries. . . . . .406
▫ Headphones Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
▫ Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
▫ Replacing The Headphone Batteries. . . . . . . . .408
▫ Unwired Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
▫ Blu-ray Disc Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398 䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
▫ Play Video Games . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
▫ Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . .417
▫ Basic Voice Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . .418
▫ Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
▫ Regulatory And Safety Information . . . . . . . . .418
▫ Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
▫ Phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
▫ General Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
▫ Voice Text Reply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
▫ Climate Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
▫ Climate (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . .428
▫ Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
▫ Uconnect Access (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . .444
䡵 PERSONALIZED MENU BAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
▫ Vehicle Health Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
䡵 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION
QUICK TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
▫ Register (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
▫ Introducing Uconnect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
▫ Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
▫ Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
4
296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Yelp (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
▫ Do Not Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
▫ SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4A/8.4AN). . . . . . . . .450
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
▫ Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
▫ Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
4
1 — Air Outlet
2 — Instrument Cluster
3 — Radio
4 — Glove/Storage Compartment
5 — Climate Controls
6 — Lower Switch Bank
7 — Hazard Switch
8 — Storage Bin (SD Card, AUX, USB Media Hub)
9 — ESC Button
10 — Keyless Push Button Ignition
11 — Hood Release
12 — Fuel Door Release
13 — Headlight Switch
14 — Dimmer Control
298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Instrument Cluster
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299
1. Tachometer
• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000).
2. Driver Information Display (DID)
• The Driver Information Display (DID) features a
driver-interactive display. Refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
3. Speedometer
• Indicates vehicle speed
4. Temperature Gauge
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating
satisfactorily.
• The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather or up mountain grades. It should not be allowed to exceed the
upper limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately
and call an authorized dealer for service.
4
300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
5. Fuel Gauge
• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position
The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the
•
vehicle where the fuel door is located.
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
IMPORTANT: The warning / indicator lights switch on
in the instrument panel together with a dedicated message and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These
indications are indicative and precautionary and as such
must not be considered as exhaustive and/or alternative
to the information contained in the Owner’s Manual,
which you are advised to read carefully in all cases.
Always refer to the information in this chapter in the
event of a failure indication.
All active telltales will display first if applicable. The
system check menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status. Some
telltales are optional and may not appear.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301
Red Telltale Indicator Lights
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
When the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a
chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will
sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
4
302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Air Bag Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is palaced
in the ON/RUN position. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on
while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This
light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has
been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303
Brake Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
United States
Canada
What It Means
Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at
the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system
malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will
remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may
be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac- indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is dropped below a specified level.
4
304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi- Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and placing the ignition in the position ON/RUN position.
the brake fluid level checked.
The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless the parking
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necesbrake is applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light
sary.
does not illuminate, have the light inspected by an
authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light turns
on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
4
306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Engine Temperature Warning Light
Red Warning
Light
What It Means
Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As engine coolant temperatures rise and
the gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after
reaching a set threshold. Further overheating will cause a continuous chime sound for 4
minutes, or until the engine is allowed to cool, whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system
is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307
Oil Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns on while driving, stop
the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible.
Battery Charge Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Battery Charge Warning Light
This light illuminates when the battery is not charging properly. If it stays on while the engine is running, there may be a malfunction with the charging system. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system
or a related component.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies.”
4
308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash depending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and
completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light should
turn off. If the light remains on with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light continues to flash when the engine is running, immediate service is required and
you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON/
RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning — If
Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning — If Equipped
This light is used to manage the electrical warning of the EPS (Power Steering System). Refer to “Power Steering” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
Door Open Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving there will also be a single chime.
4
310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Liftgate Open Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Liftgate Open Warning Light
This indicator will turn on when the liftgate is open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
Speed Limit Warning Light — If Equipped
Red Warning
Light
What It Means
Speed Limit Warning Light
If the vehicle speed is greater than or equal to 120 km/h, the Speed Warning telltale will
display in the DID, and a chime will sound with a pop up warning message.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot. This may occur with
severe usage. If this light turns on, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. Then, place the transmission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle speed or apply light foot pressure to increase
the engine speed RPM until the Transmission Temperature light turns off.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in
contact with hot engine or exhaust components and
cause a fire.
4
312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Hood Open Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Hood Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the hood is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving, a single chime will sound.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313
Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic
System called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The
light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON position before engine start. If the bulb
does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked
promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate
the light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several typical driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not
require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs.
4
314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position, and when ESC is activated. It should go out with the engine running. If the “ESC Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running,
a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater
than 30 MPH (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be ON, even if it was
turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal;
the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
• This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC event.
4
316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure
is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these
cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire in sequence.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for low tire pressure telltale.
those tires.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
IMPORTANT: Do not continue driving with one or more
flat tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the
vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. Repair
immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and
contact your authorized dealership as soon as possible.
4
318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your
sensor function checked.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the
brake system is not functioning and service is required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if the brake warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the
benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
4
320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Low Fuel Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Low Fuel Indicator Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 1.5 gal (5.8 L) this light will turn on, and remain
on until fuel is added.
Service Stop/Start System Indicator Light — If
Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Service Stop/Start System Indicator Light — If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to indicate the Stop/Start system is not functioning properly and
service is required.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321
Service Forward Collision Warning Fault Indicator
Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Service Forward Collision Warning Fault Indicator Light — If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to indicate a fault in the Forward Collision Warning System. Contact your local authorized dealer for service.
Forward Collision Warning Off Indicator Light —
If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Forward Collision Warning Off Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Forward Collision Warning is off.
4
322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the windshield washer fluid is low.
Adaptive Cruise Control Fault Indicator Light — If
Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control Fault Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the ACC is not operating and needs service. For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle.”
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323
Service 4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Service 4WD Indicator Light
If the light stays on or comes on during driving, it means that the 4WD system is not functioning properly and that service is required. We recommend you drive to the nearest service center and have the vehicle serviced immediately.
4
324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
4WD Low Indicator Light
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the four-wheel drive LOW mode. The front
and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed. Low range provides a greater gear reduction ratio to provide increased torque at the wheels.
Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation — If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for further information on four-wheel drive operation and proper use.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325
Air Suspension Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Air Suspension Light
This light will illuminate when the air suspension system is actively adjusting the ride
height.
4
326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Green Telltale Indicator Lights
Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
The instrument cluster directional arrow will flash independently for the LEFT or RIGHT
turn signal as selected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected
when the multifunction lever is moved down (LEFT) or up (RIGHT).
NOTE:
• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with
either turn signal on.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
4
328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light — If Equipped
This telltale will illuminate when the Stop/Start function is in “Autostop” mode.
Cruise Control Engaged Indicator Light — If
Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Cruise Control Engaged Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the cruise control has been set to a certain speed.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set Without Target
Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set Without Target Light
This will display the distance setting for the ACC system when the system is engaged. Refer
to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for
further information.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target
Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Light
This will display when the ACC is set and a target vehicle is detected. Refer to “Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
4
330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Sport Mode Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Sport Mode Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Sport Mode is active.
Blue Telltale Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Blue Telltale
Light
What It Means
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control
lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you to
switch the headlights back to low beam. Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high
beam on, ⬙flash to pass⬙ scenario.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331
White Telltale Indicator Lights
Cruise Control ON Indicator Light
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Cruise Control ON Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is ON, but not set.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On Light — If
Equipped
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the Adaptive Cruise Control is ON, but not set. Refer to
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
4
332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Hill Decent Control (HDC) Indicator Light — If
Equipped
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Hill Decent Control (HDC) Indicator Light
This indicator shows when the Hill Descent Control (HDC) feature is turned on. The lamp
will be on solid when HDC is armed. HDC can only be armed when the transfer case is in
the “4WD LOW” position and the vehicle speed is less then 30 mph (48 km/h). If these conditions are not met while attempting to use the HDC feature, the HDC indicator light will
flash on/off.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333
Selec Speed Control Indicator Light — If Equipped
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Selec Speed Control Indicator Light
This light will turn on when “Selec Speed Control” is activated.
To activate “Selec Speed Control”, assure the vehicle is Four Wheel Drive Low (4WD) and
push the button on the Instrument Panel.
NOTE: If the vehicle is not in 4WD Low, “To Enter Selec-Speed Shift to 4WD Low” will appear in the EVIC or DID.
4
334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Speed Warning Light — If Equipped
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Speed Warning Light
Each time the set speed is exceeded, an audible chime will sound for up to 10 seconds or
until the speed is no longer exceeded, the telltale will change from white to yellow (on color
displays), the telltale will flash in sync with the chime, and a pop up message of ⬙Speed
Warning Exceeded⬙ occurs in the DID screen.
NOTE: The vehicle user can select the desired speed at which to be notified.
NOTE: The number “120” is only an example of a speed that can be set.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335
DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID)
The DID Menu items consists of the following:
The Driver Information Display (DID) features a driver- • Speedometer Main Gauge
interactive display that is located in the instrument
• Vehicle Info
cluster.
• Terrain — If Equipped
• Driver Assist — If Equipped
• Fuel Economy
• Trip
• Stop/Start — If Equipped
• Audio
• Stored Messages
• Screen Setup
Driver Information Display (DID) Location
• Speed Warning — If Equipped
4
336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The system allows the driver to select information by • UP Arrow Button
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
Push and release the UP arrow button to scroll
wheel:
upward through the main menu and
submenus.
• DOWN Arrow Button
Push and release the DOWN arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu and
submenus.
• RIGHT Arrow Button
Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to
access the information screens or submenu
screens of a main menu item.
DID Buttons
• LEFT Arrow Button
Push and release the LEFT arrow button to
access the information screens or submenu
screens of a main menu item.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337
• OK Button
• Gear Selector Status (PRNDL)
The OK button may be used for the following:
Selection
Reset (hold)
Clearing (push)
• Selectable Information (Compass, Temp, Range to
Empty, Trip A, Trip B, Average Fuel Economy, Current
Fuel Economy)
DID Displays
• 4WD Status — If Equipped
• Air Suspension Status — If Equipped
The DID displays are located in the center portion of the The main display area will normally display the main
cluster and consist of multiple sections:
menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main
menu. The main display area also displays “pop up”
• Main Screen — The inner ring of the display will
messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warnilluminate in grey under normal conditions, yellow for
ing or information messages. These pop up messages fall
non critical warnings, red for critical warnings, and
into several categories:
white for on demand information.
• Five Second Stored Messages
• Sub-menu Dots— Whenever there are submenus
available, the position within the submenus is shown When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for five
here.
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Most of
• Reconfigurable Telltales/Information
the messages of this type are then stored (as long as the
4
338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
condition that activated it remains active) and can be • Five Second Unstored Messages
reviewed from the “Messages” main menu item. ExWhen the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
amples of this message type are “Right Front Turn Signal
message takes control of the main display area for five
Lamp Out” and “Low Tire Pressure.”
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. An
• Unstored Messages
example of this message type is “Automatic High Beams
On.”
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the
condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples Engine Oil Life Reset
of this message type are “Turn Signal On” (if a turn signal
Oil Change Required
is left on) and “Lights On” (if driver leaves the vehicle).
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
• Unstored Messages Until RUN
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start will display in the DID for five seconds after a single
feature. This message type is displayed until the ignition chime has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil
is in the RUN state. Examples of this message type are change interval. The engine oil change indicator system
“Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar” and “Press Brake is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change
interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal
Pedal and Push Button to Start.”
driving style.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. To
turn off the message temporarily, push and release the
OK button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the
following procedure.
Oil Change Reset Procedure
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Secondary Method For Oil Change Reset
1. Without depressing the brake pedal, push and release
the ENGINE START/STOP button and place the ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push and release the
2. Navigate to ⬙Oil Life⬙ submenu in ⬙Vehicle Info⬙ on
ENGINE START/STOP button and place the ignition
DID.
to the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
3. Push and Hold the OK button until the gauge resets to
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
100%.
within 10 seconds.
DID Messages
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push and release the
ENGINE START/STOP button once to return the Includes the following, but not limited to:
ignition to the OFF/LOCK position.
• Front Seatbelts Unbuckled
• Driver Seat Belt Unbuckled
4
340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Passenger Seat Belt Unbuckled
• Traction Control Off
• Washer Fluid Low
• Oil Pressure Low
• Oil Change Due
• Fuel Low
• Service Anti-lock Brake System
• Service Electronic Throttle Control
• Service Power Steering
• Cruise Off
• Cruise Ready
• ACC Override
• Cruise Set To XXX MPH
• Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s) “Inflate Tire to
XX”
• Service Tire Pressure System
• Speed Warning Set to XXX MPH
• Speed Warning Exceeded
• Parking Brake Engaged
• Brake Fluid Low
• Service Electronic Braking System
• Engine Temperature Hot
• Lights On
• Right Front Turn Signal Light Out
• Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out
• Left Front Turn Signal Light Out
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341
• Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out
• Door Open
• Ignition or Accessory On
• Doors Open
• Vehicle Not In Park
• Liftgate Open
• Remote Start Active Push Start Button
• Hood Open
• Remote Start Canceled Fuel Low
• Shift Not Allowed
• Remote Start Canceled Too Cold
• Vehicle Speed Too High To Shift to D
• Remote Start Canceled Door Open
• Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to R
• Remote Start Canceled Hood Open
• Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to P
• Remote Start Canceled Liftgate Open
• Service Transmission
• Remote Start Canceled Time Expired
• Service Shifter
• Remote Start Disabled Start To Reset
• Service Air Suspension System
• Service Air Bag System
• Normal Ride Height Achieved
• Service Air Bag Warning Light
• Aerodynamic Ride Height Achieved
4
342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Off Road 1 Ride Height Achieved
DID Selectable Menu Items
• Off Road 2 Ride Height Achieved
• Entry/Exit Ride Height Achieved
Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow buttons until the desired Selectable Menu icon/title is
highlighted in the DID.
• Selected Ride Height Not Permitted
Speedometer
• Service Air Suspension System Immediately
• Reduce Speed To Maintain Selected Ride Height
• Air Suspension System Cooling Down Please Wait
• Vehicle Cannot Be Lowered Door Open
• Air Suspension Temporarily Disabled
• Battery Low Start Engine To Change Ride Height
The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the
white or green telltales area on the right, and the amber
or red telltales area on the left.
Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow button until the Speedometer icon is
highlighted in the DID. Push and release the
Analog LEFT
or RIGHT
arrow button to select the analog or digital type of speedometer
display. Push and release the OK button to
toggle units (mph or km/h) of the speedometer.
Digital
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343
Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
Selec-Terrain — If Equipped
Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow button until the Vehicle Info icon/title is
highlighted in the DID. Push and release the
or RIGHT
arrow button to scroll
LEFT
through the information submenus and push and
release the OK button to select or reset the resettable
submenus:
Push and release the UP
or
DOWN
arrow button until the
Terrain display icon/title is highlighted in the DID. Push and release
or LEFT
arrow
the RIGHT
button to display the Selec-Terrain,
Air Suspension, Drivetrain, and
Wheel Articulation.
Tire Pressure
Transmission Temperature
Oil Temperature
Oil Pressure
Oil Life
Battery Voltage
Driver Assist — If Equipped
Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow button until the Driver Assist display
icon/title is highlighted in the DID. For
further information, refer to “Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) — If Equipped” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
4
344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Fuel Economy
Trip
Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arPush and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow button until the Fuel Economy Menu
row button until the Trip icon/title is highicon/title is highlighted. Push and hold the
lighted in the DID, then press and release the
or RIGHT
arrow button to seOK button to reset feature. Push the LEFT
LEFT
or RIGHT
arrow button to select the different lect Trip A or Trip B.
Fuel Economy sections. The Fuel Economy screen may
The Trip A and Trip B information will display the
be on the same screen as the Current Fuel Economy.
following:
• Current MPG, L/100 km, or km/L
• Distance
• Average MPG, L/100 km, or km/L
• Average Fuel Economy
• Range To Empty
• Elapsed Time
Hold the OK button to reset all the information.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345
Stop/Start — If Equipped
Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow button until the Stop/Start icon/title is
highlighted in the DID. The screen will display the Stop/Start status.
Audio
Screen Setup
Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow button until the Screen Setup Menu
icon/title is highlighted in the DID. Push
and release the OK button to enter the submenus and follow the prompts on the screen as needed.
The Screen Setup feature allows you to change what
information is displayed in the instrument cluster as
well as the location that information is displayed.
Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow button until the Audio Menu icon/title
Speed Warning — If Equipped
is highlighted in the DID.
Stored Messages
Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arPush and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow button
row button until the Speed Warning Menu
until the Messages Menu icon/title is highicon/title is highlighted in the DID. Push
lighted in the DID. This feature shows the
and release the OK button to enter speed
number of stored warning messages. Push- warning. Use the UP
or DOWN
arrow button to
arrow button will allow select a desired speed, then push and release the OK
ing the RIGHT
you to see what the stored messages are.
button to set the speed. The Speed Warning telltale
4
346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
will display in the DID, and a chime will sound with • Fuel Economy Current
a pop up warning message when the set speed is
• Trip A
exceeded.
• Trip B
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
Upper Right
Gear Display
• None
• Full (default setting)
• Compass
• Single
• Outside Temp (default setting)
Upper Left
• None
• Compass (default setting)
• Outside Temp
• Time
• Range
• Fuel Economy Average
• Time
• Range
• Fuel Economy Average
• Fuel Economy Current
• Trip A
• Trip B
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347
Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default Settings)
• Stop/Start
• Cancel
• Audio (show/hide)
• Restore
• Messages
Current Gear
• Screen Setup
• On
• Speed Warning (show/hide)
• Off (default setting)
The menu with (show/hide) means user can press OK
button to choose show or hide this menu on the DID
display.
Favorite Menus — Equipped
• Speedometer
• Vehicle Info
• Terrain (show/hide)
• Driver Assist (show/hide)
• Fuel Economy (show/hide)
• Trip Info (show/hide)
4
348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When load reduction is activated, the message “Battery
Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will appear in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery
Sensor (IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the Information Display (DID).
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low
electrical system and status of the vehicle battery.
state of charge and continues to lose electrical charge at a
In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure, or
rate that the charging system cannot sustain.
the vehicle battery conditions are deteriorating, electrical
load reduction actions will take place to extend the NOTE:
driving time and distance of the vehicle. This is done by
reducing power to or turning off non-essential electrical • The charging system is independent from load reduction. The charging system performs a diagnostic on the
loads.
charging system continuously.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is running.
It will display a message if there is a risk of battery • If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may
indicate a problem with the charging system. Refer to
depletion to the point where the vehicle may stall due to
“Battery Charge Warning Light” in “Understanding
lack of electrical supply, or will not restart after the
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
current drive cycle.
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message —
Electrical Load Reduction Actions — If Equipped
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if • Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g.
equipped), and vehicle functions which can be effected
HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights,
by load reduction:
overloaded power outlets +12V, 115V AC, USB ports)
during certain driving conditions (city driving, tow• Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
ing, frequent stopping).
• Heated/Cooled Cup Holders — If Equipped
• Installing options like additional lights, upfitter elec• Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
trical accessories, audio systems, alarms and similar
devices.
• HVAC System
• Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long
• 115V AC Power Inverter System
parking periods).
• Audio and Telematics System
• The vehicle was parked for an extended period of time
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or more of
(weeks, months).
the following conditions:
• The battery was recently replaced and was not charged
• The charging system cannot deliver enough electrical
completely.
power to the vehicle system because the electrical
loads are larger than the capability of charging system. • The battery was discharged by an electrical load left on
when the vehicle was parked.
The charging system is still functioning properly.
4
350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• The battery was used for an extended period with the After a trip:
engine not running to supply radio, lights, chargers,
• Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed
+12V portable appliances like vacuum cleaner’s, game
(additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio
consoles and similar devices.
systems, alarms) and review specifications if any (load
What to do when an electrical load reduction action
and Ignition Off Draw currents).
message is present (“Battery Saver On” or “Battery
• Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving
Saver Mode”)
time and parking time).
During a trip:
• The vehicle should have service performed if the
• Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
message is still present during consecutive trips and
– Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior)
the evaluation of the vehicle and driving pattern did
not help to identify the cause.
– Check what may be plugged in to power outlets
+12V, 115V AC, USB ports
– Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
– Check the audio settings (volume)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be
equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These
networks allow your vehicle to send and receive information. This information allows systems and features in
your vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.
Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time
and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates
and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a computer or other devices, your vehicle may require software
updates to improve the usability and performance of your
systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and
unlawful access to your vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is
installed.
WARNING!
• It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that
may result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into
your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media
of unknown origin could possibly contain malicious software, and if installed in your vehicle, it
may increase the possibility for vehicle systems to
be breached.
(Continued)
4
352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept
• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle be- information and private communications without your
havior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized consent. For further information, refer to “Privacy Pracdealer immediately.
tices – If Equipped with Uconnect 8.4 radio” in “All
About Uconnect Access” in your Uconnect Owner’s
NOTE:
Manual Supplement and “Onboard Diagnostic System
• FCA or your dealer may contact you directly regarding (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
software updates.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize
the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on
the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on
should:
the center of the instrument panel that allow you to
• Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/softwareaccess and change the customer programmable features.
update to learn about available Uconnect software
Many features can vary by vehicle.
updates.
• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g.
personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).
WARNING! (Continued)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353
4
Uconnect 5.0 Buttons On Touchscreen And Buttons On
Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Buttons On Faceplate And Buttons
On Touchscreen
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Buttons On The Faceplate
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect
system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition,
there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right
side of the Climate Controls in the center of the instrument panel. Turn the control knob to scroll through
menus and change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the
center of the control knob one or more times to select or
change a setting (i.e., ON, OFF).
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
Uconnect display.
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect
5.0 Personal Settings
Push the MORE button on the faceplate to display the
menu setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect system
allows you to access programmable features that may be
equipped such as Display, Voice, Clock & Date, Safety &
Your Uconnect system may also have Screen Off and
Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On Comfort,
Back buttons located below the Uconnect system.
Engine Off Options, Compass Settings, Audio, Phone/
Push the Screen Off button to turn off the Uconnect Bluetooth, Sirius Setup, Restore Settings, Clear Personal
touchscreen. Push the Screen Off button a second time to Data, and System Information.
turn the touchscreen on.
NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
Push the Back button to exit out of a Menu or certain time.
option on the Uconnect system.
When making a selection, press the button on the touchscreen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355
mode, press and release the preferred setting and make
your selection. Once the setting is complete, either press
the Back Arrow/Done button on the touchscreen or the
Back button on the faceplate to return to the previous
menu or press the “X” button on the touchscreen to close
out of the settings screen. Pressing the “Up” or “Down”
Arrow buttons on the right side of the screen will allow
you to toggle up or down through the available settings.
and release the “Auto” or “Manual” button on the
touchscreen. Then press the arrow back button on the
touchscreen.
NOTE: When “Day” or “Night” is selected for the
Display Mode, the usage of the Parade Mode feature will
cause the radio to activate the Display Brightness Day
control even though the headlights are on.
• Display Brightness With Headlights ON
NOTE: All settings should be changed with the ignition
When in this display, you may select the overall screen
in the RUN position.
brightness with the headlights on. Adjust the brightness
Display
with the “+” and “–” setting buttons on the touchscreen
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+”
the following settings will be available.
and “–” buttons on the touchscreen.
• Display Mode
NOTE: To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with
Headlights
ON⬙ setting, the headlights must be on and
When in this display you may select the “Auto” or
the
interior
dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or
“Manual” display settings. To change mode status, press
⬙parade⬙ positions.
4
356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
• Touchscreen Beep
When in this display, you may select the overall screen
brightness with the headlights off. Adjust the brightness
with the “+” and “–” setting buttons on the touchscreen
or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+”
and “–” buttons on the touchscreen.
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
sound heard when a button on the touchscreen is
pressed. Press the “Touchscreen Beep” button on the
touchscreen then select from “On” or “Off.”
NOTE: To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with
Headlights OFF⬙ setting, the headlights must be off and
the interior dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or
⬙parade⬙ positions.
• Set Language
When in this display, you may select one of multiple
languages (English/Français/Español) for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the “Set Language”
button on the touchscreen, then press the desired language button on the touchscreen.
Units
After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen you
may select each unit of measure independently displayed
in the Driver Information Display (DID), and navigation
system (if equipped). The following selectable units of
measure are listed below:
• Speed
Select from: “MPH” or “km/h.”
• Distance
Select from: “mi” or “km.”
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357
• Fuel Consumption
• Show Command List
Select from: “MPG” (US), “MPG” (UK), “L/100 km” or When in this display, you may change the Show Command List settings. To change the Show Command List
“km/L.”
settings, press the “Show Command List” button on the
• Pressure
touchscreen and select from “Always,” “With Help” or
Select from: “psi,” “kPa,” or “bar.”
“Never.”
• Temperature
Clock & Date
Select from: “°C,” or “°F.”
After pressing the “Clock & Date” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Voice
• Set Time & Format
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
When in this display, you may set the time and format
manually. Press the “Set Time” button then choose from
• Voice Response Length
a “12 hour” or “24 hour format.” Press the corresponding
When in this display, you may change the Voice Re- arrow above and below the current time to adjust, then
sponse Length settings. To change the Voice Response select “AM” or “PM.”
Length, press the “Voice Response Length” button on the
touchscreen and select from “Brief” or “Long.”
4
358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Set Date
When in this display, you may set the date manually.
Press the “Set Date” button then press the corresponding
arrows above and below the current date to adjust.
• Tilt Mirrors In Reverse
The ParkSense system will scan for objects behind the
vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in REVERSE
and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). It will
provide an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate the
proximity to other objects. The system can be enabled with
Sound Only, or Sound and Display. To change the
ParkSense status, press and release the “Sound Only” or
“Sounds and Display” button. Refer to “ParkSense” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for system
function and operating information.
• ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines
When this feature is selected, the exterior sideview
mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the
RUN position and the transmission gear selector is in the
REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their
Safety/Assistance
previous position when the transmission is shifted out of
After pressing the “Safety/Assistance” button on the REVERSE. To make your selection, press the “Tilt Mirrors
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
In Reverse” button on the touchscreen and make your
• ParkSense
selection.
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see
active guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera
display whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE.
The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen
display along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will disappear. To make your selection,
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359
press the “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines” • Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
button on the touchscreen and make your selection.
When this feature is selected, the system will automati• ParkView Backup Camera Delay
cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
on the windshield. To make your selection, press the
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
“Rain Sensing” button on the touchscreen and make your
delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and
selection.
the navigation or audio screen appears again. When the
vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay • Hill Start Assist — If Equipped
turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA)
will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of
system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control
“REVERSE” unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds
System” in “Starting And Operating” for system function
8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK
and operating information. To make your selection, press
or the ignition is switched to the OFF position. To set the
the “Hill Start Assist” button on the touchscreen and
ParkView Backup Camera Delay push the MORE button
make your selection.
on the faceplate, the “settings” button on the touchscreen,
then the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button on the • Paddle Shifters — If Equipped
touchscreen. Press the “Parkview Backup camera Delay” When this feature is selected, the paddle shifters can be
button on the touchscreen to turn the ParkView Delay enabled or disabled. Select the “Enable” or “Disable”
ON or OFF.
button on the touchscreen.
4
360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Steering Feel Options — If Equipped
system ON. Changing the FCW status to “OFF” prevents
the system from warning you of a possible collision with
The Steering Feel Options feature will allow you to adjust
the vehicle in front of you.
the steering effort and feel. Press the “Sport” button on
the touchscreen to provide the greatest amount of steer- The FCW system state is kept in memory from one
ing feel, requiring the highest amount of steering effort. ignition cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF, it
Press the “Normal” button on the touchscreen to provide will remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
greater steering feel, requiring greater steering effort. • Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity — If Equipped
Press the “Comfort” button on the touchscreen to provide
The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature provides an
a balance of steering feel and steering effort.
audible and/or visual warning to potential forward colli• Forward Collision On/Off Setting — If Equipped
sions. The feature can be can be set to Far, Medium or Near.
The default status of FCW is “On”, this allows the system The default status of FCW is the Far setting. This means the
to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in system will warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle
front of you. The forward collision button is located in in front of you when you are farther away. This gives you the
the Uconnect display in the controls settings. To turn the most reaction time. To change the setting for more dynamic
FCW system OFF, push the forward collision button once driving, select the Near setting. This warns you of a possible
to turn the system OFF. To turn the FCW system back collision when you are much closer to the vehicle in front of
ON, push the forward collision button again to turn the you. To change the FCW status, press and release the
“Near”, “Medium” or “Far” button.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361
For further information, refer to “Forward Collision • Lane Departure Warning (LDW) — If Equipped
Warning (FCW) With Mitigation” in “Understanding The
The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) sets the distance at
Features Of Your Vehicle”.
which the steering wheel will provide feedback for
• Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Active Braking — potential lane departures. The LDW sensitivity can be set
If Equipped
to provide either an early, medium or late warning zone
start point. To make your selection, touch the “Lane
The FCW system includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA).
Departure Warning” soft-key, until a check-mark appears
When this feature is selected, the ABA applies additional
next to setting, indicating that the setting had been
brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient
selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. The
previous menu.
ABA system becomes active at 5 mph (8 km/h). To make
your selection, press the “Forward Collision Warning • Lane Departure Warning (LDW) Strength — If
(FCW) with Mitigation - Active Braking” button on the Equipped
touchscreen, indicating that the setting had been selected.
When this feature is selected, it sets the strength of the
For further information, refer to “Forward Collision
steering wheel feedback for potential lane departures.
Warning (FCW) With Mitigation” in “Understanding The
The amount of directional torque the steering system can
Features Of Your Vehicle.”
apply to the steering wheel to correct for vehicle lane
departure can be set at Low, Medium or High. To make
your selection, touch the “Lane Departure Warning”
4
362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
soft-key until a check-mark appears next to setting, NOTE: When this feature is selected, the ParkSense
indicating that the setting had been selected. Touch the system will detect objects located behind the vehicle and
utilize autonomous braking to help stop the vehicle (only
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
enabled when ParkSense is also on). Refer to “ParkSense
• Rear ParkSense Chime Volume
Rear Braking Assist” in “Understanding The Features Of
The Rear ParkSense Chime Volume settings can be se- Your Vehicle” for system function and operating inforlected from the DID or Uconnect System — if equipped. mation.
The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and
• Blind Spot Alert
HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.
To make your selection, press the “ParkSense Rear Chime When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature
Volume” button on the touchscreen, indicating that the Provides alerts, visual and/or audible, to indicate objects
setting had been selected. ParkSense will retain its last in your blind spot. The Blind Spot Alert feature can be
known configuration state through ignition cycles.
activated in “Lights” mode. When this mode is selected,
the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and
• Rear ParkSense Braking Assist
will only show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors.
To make your selection, press the “Rear ParkSense Brak- When “Lights & Chime” mode is activated, the Blind
ing Assist” button on the touchscreen, indicating that the Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the
setting had been selected.
exterior mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn
signal is on. When “Off” is selected, the Blind Spot
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363
Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated. To change the setting, press the “Headlight Off Delay” button on the
Blind Spot Alert status, press the “Off,” “Lights” or touchscreen, and choose either 0 sec, 30 sec, 60 sec or 90
seconds.
“Lights & Chime” button on the touchscreen.
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
in the BSM not operating to specification.
Lights
• Headlight Illumination On Approach
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of
the amount of time the headlights remain on after the
doors are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
Key Fob. To change the Illuminated Approach status,
press the “Illuminated Approach” button and choose
either 0 sec, 30 sec, 60 sec or 90 seconds.
• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen the
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
following settings will be available.
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on ap• Headlights Off Delay
proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
the amount of time the headlights remain on after the turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
engine is shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay your selection, press the “Lights w/Wipers” button on
the touchscreen and make your selection.
4
364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Auto High Beams — If Equipped
Fob or the Passive Entry Feature. To make your selection,
press the “Flash Lights w/Lock” button on the touchWhen this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
screen and select from “On” or “Off.”
will activate/deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To make your selection, press the “Auto High Doors & Locks
Beams” button on the touchscreen and make your selec- After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touchtion. Refer to “Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control screen the following settings will be available.
— If Equipped” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
• Auto Door Locks
Vehicle” for further information.
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock auto• Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
matically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on (24 km/h). To make your selection, press the “Auto Door
whenever the engine is running. To make your selection, Locks” button on the touchscreen and select from “On”
press the “Daytime Running Lights” button on the touch- or “Off.”
screen and make your selection.
• Auto Unlock On Exit
• Flash Lights w/Lock
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE Key PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365
opened. To make your selection, press the “Auto Unlock • Horn w/Remote Start — If Equipped
On Exit” button on the touchscreen and select from “On”
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
or “Off.”
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
• Flash Lights w/Lock
press the “Horn w/Remote Start” button on the touchscreen and select from “On” or “Off.”
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote • Remote Door Unlock
Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fob or the Passive Entry
When “Remote Door Unlock” is selected, you may
Feature. To make your selection, press the “Flash Lights
choose from “Driver” or “All.” Select “All” to have all
w/Lock” button on the touchscreen and select from “On”
doors unlock with the first push of the Key Fob. Select
or “Off.”
“Driver” to have the only the driver door open with the
• Horn w/Lock
first push of the key fob.
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the Key Fob Lock button is pressed. To make your
selection, press the “Sound Horn With Lock” button on
the touchscreen and select from “Off,” ”1st Press,” or
“2nd Press.”
NOTE: Passive Entry — If Equipped. If “All” is selected,
all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry door
handle is grasped. If “Driver” is selected, only the
driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is
grasped.
4
366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Passive Entry
unlock the door. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for furThis feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
ther information.
door(s) without having to press the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) Key Fob lock or unlock buttons. To make • Power Lift Gate Alert — If Equipped
your selection, press the “Passive Entry” button on the This feature plays an alert when the power lift gate is
touchscreen and select from “On” or “Off.” Refer to raising or lowering. To make your selection, press the
“Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Things To Know Before Start- “Power Lift Gate Alert” button on the touchscreen and
ing Your Vehicle” for further information.
select from “On” or “Off.”
• Memory Linked to Fob — If Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle. To make your selection, press the “Memory
Linked to Fob” button on the touchscreen and select from
“On” or “Off.”
Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start”
button on the touchscreen the following settings will be
available:
• Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering
Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
location if “Memory Linked to Fob” is set to (ON) when When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fob is used to heated steering wheel will automatically turn ON when
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367
temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will
turn ON. To make your selection, press the “Auto Heated
Seats” button on the touchscreen, then select either “Off,”
“Remote Start” or “All Starts.”
button on the touchscreen and choose from “0,” “30,”
“60,” or “90” seconds to select your desired time interval.
• Engine Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect phone system (if equipped),
Engine Off Options
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to
touchscreen the following settings will be available.
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. Press the “En• Easy Exit Seats — If Equipped
gine Off Power Delay” button on the touchscreen and
When this feature is selected, the Driver’s seat will choose from “0 sec,” “45 sec,” “5 min” or “10 min” to
automatically move rearward once the engine is shut off. select your desired time interval.
To make your selection, press the “Easy Exit Seats”
• Auto Entry/Exit — If Equipped
button on the touchscreen and make your selection.
When this feature is selected, it automatically lowers the
• Headlight Off Delay
vehicle ride height position when shifted into park. Press
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to the “Auto Entry/Exit” button on the touchscreen and
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds choose from “On” or “Off.”
when exiting the vehicle. Press the “Headlight Off Delay”
4
368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Compass Settings — If Equipped
After pressing the “Compass Settings” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
NOTE: Before compass calibration is performed, the
compass variance zone should be set for best results.
• Compass Variance
Press “Compass Variance” on the touchscreen to change
this setting. You will then be able to select a compass
variance of 1 through 15 per the compass variance zone
map figure.
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is being driven, illustrated in the zone map.
Once properly set, the compass will automatically compensate for the differences when calibrated, and provide
the most accurate compass headings.
Compass Variance Zone Map
• Compass Calibration
Press “Compass Calibration” on the touchscreen to enter
calibration. To start calibration of the compass, press the
“YES” button on the touchscreen and complete one or
more 360-degree turns (in an area free from large metal or
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369
metallic objects). A message will appear on the touch- • Balance/Fade
screen when the compass has been successfully caliThis feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade
brated.
settings. Press and drag the speaker icon or use the
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the arrows to adjust, tap the “C” icon to readjust to the center.
instrument panel, such as Mobile Phones, Laptops and • Speed Adjusted Volume
Radar Detectors. This is where the compass module is
located, and it can cause interference with the compass This feature increases or decreases volume relative to
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume
sensor, and it may give false readings.
press the “Speed Adjusted Volume” button on the touchAudio
screen and select from “Off,” “1,” “2” or “3” buttons on
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen the the touchscreen.
following settings will be available:
• Surround Sound — If Equipped
• Equalizer
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and To make your selection, press the “Surround Sound”
Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–” button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.”
buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on
the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen.
4
370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped
Suspension — If Equipped
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level After pressing the “Suspension” button on the touchfor portable devices connected through the AUX input. screen the following settings will be available:
To make your selection, press the “AUX Volume Offset” • Auto Entry/Exit Suspension
button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.”
When this feature is selected, the vehicle automatically
• Loudness — If Equipped
lowers from ride height position when the vehicle is
This feature improves sound quality at lower volumes. shifted to park for easy entry/exit. To make your selecTo make your selection, press the “Loudness” button on tion, press the “Auto Entry/Exit” button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off” followed by pressing the
the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.”
back arrow button on the touchscreen.
Phone/Bluetooth
• Suspension Display Messages
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the
When All is selected, all the Air Suspension Alerts will be
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
displayed. When Warnings Only is selected only the Air
• Paired Devices
Suspension Warnings will be displayed.
This feature shows which phones are paired to the
Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer
to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371
• Tire Jack Mode
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
When this feature is selected the air suspension system is
disabled to prevent auto leveling of the suspension, while
the vehicle is on a jack changing a tire. To make your
selection, press the “Tire Jack Mode” button on the
touchscreen, select “On” or “Off” followed by pressing
the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
• Channel Skip
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make
• Transport Mode
your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on the
When this feature is selected the air suspension system is touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip
disabled to assist with flat bed towing. To make your followed by pressing the back arrow button on the
selection, press the “Transport Mode” button on the touchscreen.
touchscreen, select “On” or “Off” followed by pressing
• Subscription Information
the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
• Wheel Alignment Mode
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
This feature prevents auto leveling of the air suspension with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
while performing a wheel alignment service. Before per- services, it will be necessary to access the information on
forming a wheel alignment this mode must be enabled. the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
Refer to your authorized dealer for further information.
4
372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen select “Yes” to restore, or “Cancel” to exit. Once the
settings are restored, a pop up appears stating ⬙settings
to access the Subscription Information screen.
reset to default.⬙
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on Clear Personal Data
the screen or visit the provider online.
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
and is available for U.S. residents only.
• Clear Personal Data
Restore Settings
When this feature is selected it will remove personal data
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the including Bluetooth devices and presets. To remove
personal information, press the “Clear Personal Data”
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
button and a pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure
• Restore Settings
you want to clear all personal data?” select “Yes” to Clear,
When this feature is selected it will reset the Display, or “Cancel” to exit. Once the data has been cleared, a pop
Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings. up appears stating ⬙Personal data cleared”.
To restore the settings to their default setting, press the
Restore Settings button. A pop-up will appear asking
⬙Are you sure you want to reset your settings to default?”
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373
System Information
NOTE:
After pressing the “System Information” button on the • Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time.
touchscreen the following information will be available:
• Depending on the vehicles options, feature settings
• System Information
may vary.
When System Information is selected, a System Information screen will appear displaying the system software When making a selection, press the button on the touchscreen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
version.
mode, press and release the preferred setting “option”
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
8.4 Settings
that setting has been selected. Once the setting is comPress the “Apps
” button, then press the “Settings” plete, either press the Back Arrow button on the touchbutton on the touchscreen to display the menu setting screen to return to the previous menu, or press the “X”
screen. In this mode the Uconnect system allows you button on the touchscreen to close out of the settings
to access programmable features that may be screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on the
equipped such as Display, Units, Voice, Clock, Safety right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or
& Driving Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On down through the available settings.
Comfort, Engine Off Options, Audio, Phone/
Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup, Restore Settings, Clear
Personal Data, and System Information.
4
374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
“–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any
point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen
touchscreen.
the following settings will be available.
NOTE: To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with
• Display Mode
Headlights ON⬙ setting, the headlights must be on and
When in this display you may select one of the auto the interior dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or
display settings. To change Mode status, select from ⬙parade⬙ positions.
“Day,” “Night” or “Auto” until a check-mark appears
next to the setting, showing that setting has been se- • Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
lected.
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
NOTE: When Day or Night is selected for the Display the headlights off. Adjust the brightness with the “+” and
Mode, the usage of the Parade Mode feature will cause “–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any
the radio to activate the Display Brightness Day control point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen.
even though the headlights are on.
Display
NOTE: To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with
Headlights OFF⬙ setting, the headlights must be off and
When in this display, you may select the brightness with the interior dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or
the headlights on. Adjust the brightness with the “+” and ⬙parade⬙ positions.
• Display Brightness With Headlights ON
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 375
• Set Theme
Press the “Touchscreen Beep” button on the touchscreen
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
This feature will allow you to choose a background
that setting has been selected.
theme for the display screen. The theme will change the
background color, highlight color, and button color of the • Controls Screen Time-Out
display screen.
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
• Set Language
ability for the controls screen to time out. Press the
“Controls Screen Time-Out” button on the touchscreen
When in this display, you may select one of multiple
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
languages (English/Français/Español) for all display nothat setting has been selected.
menclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the “Set Language” • Navigation Turn-By-Turn Displayed In Cluster — If
button on the touchscreen, then select the desired lan- Equipped
guage button on the touchscreen.
To make your selection, press the “Navigation Turn-By• Touchscreen Beep
Turn Displayed In Cluster” button on the touchscreen,
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
that setting has been selected.
sound heard when button on the touchscreen is pressed.
4
376 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Units
• Temperature
After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen you
may select each unit of measure independently displayed
in the Driver Information Display (DID), and navigation
system (if equipped). The following selectable units of
measure are listed below:
Select from: “°C,” or “°F.”
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
• Speed
• Voice Response Length
Select from: “MPH” or “km/h.”
When in this display, you may change the Voice Response Length settings. To change the Voice Response
Length, press the “Brief” or “Detailed” button on the
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
• Distance
Select from: “mi” or “km.”
• Fuel Consumption
• Show Command List
Select from: “MPG” (US), “MPG” (UK), “L/100 km” or
“km/L.”
When in this display, you may choose to Always, With
Help, or Never display the Teleprompter with possible
• Pressure
options while in a voice session. To change the Show
Select from: “psi,” “kPa,” or “bar.”
Command List settings, press the “Always,” “With
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 377
Help,” or “Never” button on the touchscreen until a • Set Time Minutes
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that This feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The
setting has been selected.
“Sync time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be
unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–”
Clock
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the minutes up or
After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen the
down.
following settings will be available:
• Time Format
• Sync Time With GPS
This feature will allow you to select the time format display
This feature will allow the radio to sync time with a GPS
setting. Press the “Time Format” button on the touchscreen
signal. To change the Sync Time setting, press the “Sync
until a check-mark appears next to the “12 hrs” or “24 hrs”
time with GPS” button on the touchscreen until a checksetting, showing that setting has been selected.
mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has
• Show Time In Status Bar — If Equipped
been selected.
• Set Time Hours
This feature will allow you to turn on or shut off the
digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time
This feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The “Sync
Status setting press the “Show Time in Status Bar” button
time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be unon the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to
checked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–”
setting, indicating that the setting has been selected.
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the hours up or down.
4
378 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
After pressing the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button
Vehicle”.
on the touchscreen the following settings will be avail• Forward Collision On/Off Setting — If Equipped
able:
Safety & Driving Assistance
• Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity — If
Equipped
The default status of FCW is “On”, this allows the system
to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in
front of you. The forward collision button is located in
the Uconnect display in the controls settings. To turn the
FCW system OFF, push the forward collision button once
to turn the system OFF. To turn the FCW system back
ON, push the forward collision button again to turn the
system ON. Changing the FCW status to “OFF” prevents
the system from warning you of a possible collision with
the vehicle in front of you.
The Front Collision Warning (FCW) Sensitivity feature
provides an audible and/or visual warning to potential
forward collisions. The feature can be can be set to Far,
Medium or Near. The default status of FCW Sensitivity is
the Far setting. This means the system will warn you of a
possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when
you are farther away. This gives you the most reaction
time. To change the setting for more dynamic driving,
select the Near setting. This warns you of a possible The FCW system state is kept in memory from one
collision when you are much closer to the vehicle in front ignition cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF, it
of you. To change the FCW Sensitivity status, press and will remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
release the “Near”, “Medium” or “Far” button.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 379
• Paddle Shifters — If Equipped
• Lane Departure Warning (LDW) — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the paddle shifters can be The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) sets the distance at
enabled or disabled. Select the “Enable” or “Disable” which the steering wheel will provide feedback for
potential lane departures. The LDW sensitivity can be set
button on the touchscreen.
to provide either an early, medium or late warning zone
• Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Active Braking —
start point. To make your selection, touch the “Lane
If Equipped
Departure Warning” soft-key, until a check-mark appears
The FCW system includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA). next to setting, indicating that the setting had been
When this feature is selected, the ABA applies additional selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient previous menu.
brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. The
• Lane Departure Warning (LDW) Strength — If
ABA system becomes active at 5 mph (8 km/h). To make
Equipped
your selection, press the “Forward Collision Warning
(FCW) with Mitigation - Active Braking” button on the When this feature is selected, it sets the strength of the
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, steering wheel feedback for potential lane departures.
indicating that the setting had been selected. For further The amount of directional torque the steering system can
information, refer to “Forward Collision Warning (FCW) apply to the steering wheel to correct for vehicle lane
With Mitigation” in “Understanding The Features Of departure can be set at Low, Medium or High. To make
your selection, touch the “Lane Departure Warning”
Your Vehicle.”
4
380 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
soft-key until a check-mark appears next to setting,
indicating that the setting had been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
• ParkSense
CAUTION!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when
an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
The ParkSense system will scan for objects behind the
vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph
(18 km/h). It will provide an alert (audible and/or
visual) to indicate the proximity to other objects. The
system can be enabled with Sound Only, or Sound and
Display. To change the ParkSense status, press and release the “Sound” or “Sound and Display” button. Refer
to “ParkSense” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for system function and operating information. • Front ParkSense Chime Volume
The Front ParkSense Chime Volume settings can be
selected from the Driver Information Display (DID) or
Uconnect System — if equipped. The chime volume
settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH. The factory
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 381
default volume setting is MEDIUM. To make your selection, press the “ParkSense Front Chime Volume” button
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting had been selected.
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
through ignition cycles.
• Rear ParkSense Braking Assist
• Rear ParkSense Chime Volume
NOTE: When this feature is selected, the ParkSense
system will detect objects located behind the vehicle and
utilize autonomous braking to help stop the vehicle (only
enabled when ParkSense is also on). Refer to “ParkSense
Rear Braking Assist” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle” for system function and operating information.
To make your selection, press the “Rear ParkSense Braking Assist” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, indicating that the setting had
been selected.
The Rear ParkSense Chime Volume settings can be selected from the DID or Uconnect System — if equipped.
The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and
HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.
To make your selection, press the “ParkSense Rear Chime
Volume” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
• Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse
appears next to setting, indicating that the setting had
been selected. ParkSense will retain its last known con- When this feature is selected, the exterior side view
figuration state through ignition cycles.
mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the
RUN position and the transmission gear selector is in the
REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their
4
382 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
previous position when the transmission is shifted out of
REVERSE. To make your selection, press the “Tilt Side
Mirrors In Reverse” button on the touchscreen, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the
setting had been selected.
• Blind Spot Alert
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature
Provides alerts, visual and/or audible, to indicate objects
in your blind spot. The Blind Spot Alert feature can be
activated in “Lights” mode. When this mode is selected,
the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and
will only show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors.
When “Lights & Chime” mode is activated, the Blind
Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the
exterior mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn
signal is on. When “Off” is selected, the Blind Spot
Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated. To change the
Blind Spot Alert status, press the “Off,” “Lights” or
“Lights & Chime” button on the touchscreen.
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
in the BSM not operating to specification.
• ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see
active guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera display whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The
image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display
along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings”
across the top of the screen. After five seconds, this note
will disappear. To change the mode status, press the
“ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines” button on
the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
indicating that the setting had been selected.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 383
• ParkView Backup Camera Delay
• Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and
the navigation or audio screen appears again. When the
vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay
turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines
will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of
“REVERSE” unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds
8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into
“PARK” or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
To set the ParkView Backup Camera Delay press the
“Controls” button on the touchscreen, the “settings”
button on the touchscreen, then the “Safety & Driving
Assistance” button on the touchscreen. Press the
“Parkview Backup camera Delay” button on the touchscreen to turn the ParkView Delay ON or OFF.
When this feature is selected, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
on the windshield. To make your selection, press the
“Rain Sensing” button on the touchscreen, until a checkmark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting
had been selected.
• Hill Start Assist — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA)
system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control
System” in “Starting And Operating” for system function
and operating information. To make your selection, press
the “Hill Start Assist” button on the touchscreen, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the
setting had been selected.
4
384 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Steering Feel Options — If Equipped
press the “+” or “–” button on the touchscreen to select
your desired time interval, and choose either 0 sec, 30 sec,
The Steering Feel Options feature will allow you to adjust
60 sec or 90 seconds.
the steering effort and feel. Press the “Sport” button on
the touchscreen to provide the greatest amount of steer- • Headlight Illumination On Approach
ing feel, requiring the highest amount of steering effort. When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
Press the “Normal” button on the touchscreen to provide and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors
greater steering feel, requiring greater steering effort. are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Key
Press the “Comfort” button on the touchscreen to provide Fob. To change the Illuminated Approach status, press
a balance of steering feel and steering effort.
the “+” or “–” button on the touchscreen to select your
Lights
desired time interval.
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen the • Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
following settings will be available.
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
• Headlight Off Delay
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on apWhen this feature is selected, it allows adjustment of the proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine
is shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay setting, turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
your selection, press the Headlights With Wipers button
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 385
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to • Flash Lights With Lock
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
• Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE Key
Fob. This feature may be selected with or without the
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
sound horn on lock feature selected. To make your
will activate/deactivate automatically under certain conselection, press the “Flash Lights with Lock” button on
ditions. To make your selection, press the “Auto High
the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
Beams” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Refer to “Automatic High Beam Headlamp Doors & Locks
Control — If Equipped” in “Understanding The Features
After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touchOf Your Vehicle” for further information.
screen the following settings will be available.
• Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
• Auto Door Locks
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
whenever the vehicle is set in motion. To make your
selection, press the “Daytime Running Lights” button on
the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h).
To make your selection, press the “Auto Door Locks” button
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
4
386 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Auto Unlock On Exit
• Sound Horn With Lock
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or
NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To
make your selection, press the “Auto Unlock on Exit”
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, showing that setting has been selected.
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the door locks are activated. To make your selection,
press either the “Off,” “1st Press,” or “2nd Press” button
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
• Flash Lights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fob, or when using the passive
entry feature. This feature may be selected with or
without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make
your selection, press the “Flash Lights with Lock” button
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting has been selected.
• Sound Horn With Remote Start
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
press the “Sound Horn with Remote Start” button on the
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected.
• 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
When ⬙Driver Door⬙ is selected with 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks, only the driver’s door will unlock with the first
press of the RKE Key Fob UNLOCK button. You must
press the RKE Key Fob UNLOCK button twice to unlock
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 387
the passenger’s doors. When ⬙All Doors⬙ is selected for Entry” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, all doors will unlock on the appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Things To
first press of the RKE Key Fob UNLOCK button.
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks “All Doors,” all doors will unlock no matter which • Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob — If Equipped
Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If 1st Press
This feature provides automatic recall of all settings
Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, only
stored to a memory location (driver’s seat, exterior
the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is
grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press Of Key Fob mirrors, steering column position and radio station preUnlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, touching the sets) to enhance driver mobility when entering and
handle more than once will only result in the driver’s door exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press the
opening. If “Driver Door” is selected, once the driver door “Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob” button on the
is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected.
to unlock all doors (or use RKE Key Fob).
• Passive Entry
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles
to ON) when the RKE Key Fob is used to unlock the door.
door(s) without having to press the RKE Key Fob lock or
Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding The
unlock buttons. To make your selection, press the “Passive
Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
4
388 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Power Lift Gate Chime — If Equipped
Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start” button on the touchscreen, then select either “Off,” “Remote Start” or “All
This feature plays an alert when the power lift gate is
Starts” until a check-mark appears next to setting, showraising or lowering. To make your selection, press the
ing that setting has been selected.
“Power Lift Gate Chime” button on the touchscreen, until
a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that Engine Off Options
setting has been selected.
After pressing the Engine Off Options button on the
Auto-On Comfort — If Equipped
touchscreen the following settings will be available.
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort” button on the • Easy Entry/Exit Seat — If Equipped
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
• Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering
Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped
vehicle. To make your selection, press the “Easy Exit Seat”
button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat will
to setting, showing that setting has been selected.
automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40° F
(4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the • Engine Off Power Delay
driver vented seat will turn on. To make your selection, When this feature is selected, the power window
press the “Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & switches, radio, Uconnect phone system (if equipped),
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 389
the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. To change the
Engine Off Power Delay status press the press the “+” or
“-” button to choose from “0 seconds,” “45 seconds,” “5
minutes,” or “10 minutes.”
Audio
• Headlight Off Delay
• Balance/Fade
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off
Delay status press the “+” or “-” button on the touchscreen to select your desired time interval.
This feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade
settings. Press and drag the speaker icon, use the arrows
to adjust, or tap the ‘C’ icon to readjust to the center.
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available.
• Equalizer
This feature allows you to adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble
settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–” setting
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on
automatically lower the vehicle from ride height position the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
when the vehicle is shifted to park. To change the mode touchscreen.
status press the “Auto Entry/Exit Suspension” button on
• Auto Entry/Exit Suspension — If Equipped
4
390 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your • Loudness — If Equipped
finger up or down to change the setting as well as press
Loudness improves sound quality at lower volumes. To
directly on the desired setting.
make your selection, press the “Loudness” button on the
• Speed Adjusted Volume
touchscreen, then choose “Yes” or “No.”
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to Phone/Bluetooth
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the
press the “Off,” “1,” “2” or “3” button on the touchscreen.
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Surround Sound — If Equipped
• Paired Phones
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode. This feature shows which phones are paired to the
To make your selection, press the “Surround Sound” Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer
button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.”
to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
• AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped
• Paired Audio Sources
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level This feature shows which audio devices are paired to the
for portable devices connected through the AUX input. Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer
To make your selection, press the AUX Volume Offset to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
button on the touchscreen, choose a level from –3 to +3.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 391
Suspension — If Equipped
• Tire Jack Mode
After pressing the “Suspension” button on the touch- When this feature is selected the air suspension system is
screen the following settings will be available:
disabled to prevent auto leveling of the suspension, while
the vehicle is on a jack changing a tire. Press the box next
• Auto Entry/Exit Suspension
to your selection and a check-mark appears next to the
When this feature is selected, the vehicle automatically feature showing the system has been activated or the
lowers from ride height position when vehicle shifted to check-mark is removed showing the system has been
park for easy entry/exit. Press the box next to your deactivated.
selection and a check-mark appears next to the feature
showing the system has been activated or the check-mark • Transport Mode
is removed showing the system has been deactivated.
When this feature is selected the air suspension system is
disabled to assist with flat bed towing. Press the box next
• Suspension Display Messages
to your selection and a check-mark appears next to the
When All is selected, all the Air Suspension Alerts will be feature showing the system has been activated or the
displayed. When Warnings Only is selected only the Air check-mark is removed showing the system has been
Suspension Warnings will be displayed.
deactivated.
4
392 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Wheel Alignment Mode
with only a few seconds left to play. To make your
selection, press the “Tune Start” button on the touchThis feature prevents auto leveling of the air suspension
screen, select “On” or “Off.”
while performing a wheel alignment service. Before
performing a wheel alignment this mode must be en- • Channel Skip
abled. Refer to your authorized dealer for further infor- SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of
mation.
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make
your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on the
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touchtouchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip
screen, the following settings will be available:
followed by pressing the back arrow button on the
• Tune Start
touchscreen.
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
Tune Start begins playing the current song from the
beginning when you tune to a music channel using one of
the twelve presets, so you can enjoy the complete song.
This feature occurs the first time the preset is selected
during that current song. Tune Start works in the background, so you will not even realize it’s on, except that
you will miss the experience of joining your favorite song
• Subscription Information
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
services, it will be necessary to access the information on
the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 393
Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen “Restore Settings” button on the touchscreen and pop-up
will appear asking ⬙Are you sure you want to reset your
to access the Subscription Information screen.
settings to default?” select “OK” to restore, or “Cancel” to
Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To
exit. Once the settings are restored, a pop-up appears
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
stating ⬙Settings Reset To Default.⬙
the screen or visit the provider online.
Clear Personal Data
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data” button on the
and is available for U.S. residents only.
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Restore Settings
• Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the When this feature is selected it will remove personal data
including Bluetooth devices and presets. To remove
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
personal information, press the “Clear Personal Data”
• Restore Settings
button and a pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure
When this feature is selected it will reset the Display, you want to clear all personal data?” select “OK” to
Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings. Clear, or “Cancel” to exit. Once the data has been cleared,
To restore the settings to their default setting, press the a pop up appears stating ⬙Personal Data Cleared.”
4
394 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
System Information
iPod/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
After pressing the “System Information” button on the This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
plugged into the USB port.
• System Information
iPod control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod
When System Information is selected, a System Informa- and iPhone devices. Some iPod software versions may
tion screen will appear displaying the system software not fully support the iPod control features. Please visit
Apple’s website for software updates.
version.
UCONNECT RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED
For detailed information about your Uconnect radio,
refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s
Manual Supplement.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 395
UCONNECT REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT (RSE)
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Your Rear Seat Entertainment System is designed to give
your family years of enjoyment. You can play your
favorite CDs, DVDs or Blu-ray Discs, listen to audio over
the wireless headphones, or plug and play a variety of
standard video games or audio devices. Please review
this Owner’s Manual to become familiar with its features
and operation.
4
Getting Started
• Screen(s) located in the rear of front seats: Open the
LCD screen cover by lifting up on cover.
RSE System Screen
• Place the ignition in the ON or ACC position.
• Your vehicle may be equipped with a Blu-ray Disc
Player. If equipped with a Blu-ray Disc Player, the icon
will be present on the Player.
396 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Turn on the Rear Seat Entertainment system by push- • With the Dual Video Screen System, Channel 1 (Rear 1)
ing the Power button on the remote control.
on the Remote Control and Headphones refers to
Screen 1 (driver’s side) and Channel 2 (Rear 2) on the
• When the Video Screen(s) are open and a DVD/BluRemote Control and Headphones refers to Screen 2
ray Disc is inserted into the Disc player, the screen(s)
(passenger side).
turn(s) ON automatically, the headphone transmitters
turn ON and playback begins.
RSE System Channel 1 (Rear 1)
RSE System Remote Control Channel Selectors
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 397
Dual Video Screen
NOTE: Typically there are two different ways to operate
the features of the Rear Seat Entertainment System.
• The Remote Control
• The Touchscreen Radio (If Equipped)
RSE System Headphone Channel Selectors
• The system can be controlled by the front seat occupants utilizing either the touchscreen radio, or by the
rear seat occupants using the remote control.
4
398 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Blu-ray Disc Player
Play A Blu-ray Disc
The Blu-ray Disc player is located in the center console.
radio automatically selects the appropriate mode after
the disc is recognized and displays the menu screen,
the language screen, or starts playing the first track.
2. To watch a Blu-ray disc on Rear 1 for driver’s side rear
passengers, ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on Rear 1.
3. To watch a Blu-ray disc on Rear 2 for passenger side
rear passengers, ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on Rear 2.
NOTE:
• To view a Blu-ray disc on the radio, press the “Media”
button on the touchscreen, and then press the “Disc”
button. Press the “Play” button, and then the “full
screen” button.
• Viewing a Blu-ray disc on the radio screen is not
Blu-ray Disc Player Location
available in all states/provinces. The vehicle must be
1. Insert a Blu-ray disc into the VES disc player with the
stopped, and the gear selector must be in the PARK
label facing as indicated on the Blu-ray player. The
position for vehicles with automatic transmission.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 399
Using The Touchscreen Radio
is not highlighted, select button to access controls for
Screen 1/Channel 1 source.
2. RSE Power
Press to turn RSE On/Off.
3. RSE Mute
Mute rear headphones for the current ignition cycle.
Pressing mute again will unmute rear headphones.
4. RSE Remote Control Lock Out
Press to enable/disable Remote Control functions.
5. RSE Channel 2 Mode
Rear Media Control Screen
Indicates the current source for Screen 2/Channel 2. This
button will be highlighted when it is the active Screen/
Indicates the current source for Screen 1/Channel 1. This Channel being controlled by the front user. If this button
button will be highlighted when it is the active Screen/ is not highlighted, select button to access controls for
Channel being controlled by the front user. If this button Screen 2/Channel 2 source.
1. RSE Channel 1 Mode
4
400 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
6. Radio Full Screen Mode
Using The Remote Control
• Select an audio channel (Rear 1 for driver’s side rear
screen and Rear 2 for passenger’s side rear screen), and
7. Cabin Audio Mode
then press the source key, and using the up and down
Select this button to change the cabin audio to the rear
arrows, highlight disc from the menu and press the OK
entertainment source currently shown on the rear media
button.
control screen.
• Press the popup/menu key to navigate the disc menu
8. RSE Mode
and options.
Select this button to change source for the active (highlighted) rear Screen/Channel on the rear media control
screen.
Select this button to change to Full Screen Mode.
• Press the Media button on the touchscreen, and then
press the Rear Media button on the touchscreen.
• Press the OK button on the touchscreen to begin
playing the Blu-ray Disc on the touchscreen radio.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 401
Audio/Video RCA/HDMI Jacks (AUX/HDMI Jacks) on
Connect the video game console to the Audio/Video the side of each seat enable the monitor to display video
RCA/HDMI input jacks located on the side of each seat. directly from a video camera, connect video games for
display on the screen, or play music directly from an MP3
player.
Play Video Games
When connecting an external source to the AUX/HDMI
input, ensure to follow the standard color coding for the
audio/video jacks:
1. HDMI Input.
2. Right audio in (red).
3. Left audio in (white).
4. Video in (yellow).
Audio/Video RCA/HDMI Input Jacks
NOTE: Certain high-end video games consoles may
exceed the power limit of the vehicle’s Power Inverter.
4
402 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Play A DVD/Blu-ray Disc Using The Touchscreen
Radio
1. Insert the DVD/Blu-ray Disc with the label facing as
indicated on the DVD/Blu-ray Disc player. The radio
automatically selects the appropriate mode after the
disc is recognized and displays the menu screen or
starts playing the first track.
2. While looking at Rear 1 or 2, highlight DISC by either
pushing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons, then push
ENTER/OK.
2. To watch a DVD/Blu-ray Disc on Rear 1 (driver’s side
rear passenger), ensure the Remote Control and Headphone channel selector switch is on Rear 1.
3. To watch a DVD/Blu-ray Disc on Rear 2 (passenger’s
side rear passenger), ensure the Remote Control and
Headphone channel selector switch is on Rear 2.
Using The Remote Control
1. Push the SOURCE button on the Remote Control.
Select DISC Mode On The Rear Seat Entertainment
Screen
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 403
3. Press the 1 or 2 buttons on the touchscreen, and the
select source button on the touchscreen. Press the
1. Press the Media button on the Uconnect radio touchDISC button on the touchscreen in the MEDIA colscreen.
umn. To exit, press the X at the top right of the screen.
2. Press the Rear Media button to display the Rear Media
Control screen.
Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls
Rear Seat Entertainment Source Screen
Rear Media Control Screen
4
404 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Pressing the screen on the radio while a DVD or Blu-ray Disc Player Remote Control — If
Blu-ray Disc is playing, brings up the basic remote Equipped
control functions for DVD play such as scene selection,
Play, Pause, FF, RW, and Stop. Pressing the X in the upper
corner will turn OFF the remote control screen functions.
Important Notes For Dual Video Screen System
• The Rear Seat Entertainment System is able to transmit
two channels of stereo audio and video simultaneously.
• The Blu-ray Disc Player can play CDs, DVDs and
Blu-ray Discs.
• When selecting a video source on Rear 1, the video source
will display on Rear 1 and can be heard on Rear 1.
• When selecting a video source on Rear 2, the video source
will display on Rear 2 and can be heard on Rear 2.
• Audio can be heard through the headphones even
when the screen(s) are closed.
Blu-ray Player Remote Control
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 405
Controls And Indicators
6. SETUP — Push to access the screen settings menu.
1. Power — Turns the screen and wireless headphone 7. 䉴䉴 — Push and hold to fast forward through the
transmitter for the selected Channel on or off. To hear
current audio track or video chapter.
audio while the screen is closed, push the Power
8. 䉴 / 㥋 (Play/Pause) — Begin/resume or pause disc
button to turn the headphone transmitter on.
play.
2. Channel Selector Indicators — When a button is
9. Four Colored Buttons — Push to access Blu-ray Disc
pushed, the currently affected channel or channel
features.
button is illuminated momentarily.
10. POPUP/MENU — Push to bring up repeat and
3. SOURCE — Push to enter Source Selection screen.
shuffle options, the Blu-ray Disc popup menu, the
DVD title menu, or to access disc menus.
4. Channel/Screen Selector Switch — Indicates which
channel is being controlled by the remote control.
11. KEYPAD — Push to navigate chapters or titles.
When the selector switch is in the Rear 1 position, the
remote controls the functionality of headphone Chan- 12. ▪ (Stop) — Stops disc play.
nel 1 (left screen). When the selector switch is in the
13. 䉳䉳 — Push and hold to fast rewind through the
Rear 2 position, the remote controls the functionality
current audio track or video chapter.
of headphone Channel 2 (right screen).
— Mutes headphone audio.
14.
5. 䉴 — Push to navigate menus.
4
406 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
15. BACK — Push to exit out of menus or return to Headphones Operation
source selection screen.
The headphones receive two separate channels of audio
using an infrared transmitter from the video screen.
16. 䉲 — Push to navigate menus.
17. OK — Push to select the highlighted option in a If no audio is heard after increasing the volume control,
verify that the screen is turned on, the channel is not
menu.
muted and the headphone channel selector switch is on
18. 䉳 — Push to navigate menus.
the desired channel. If audio is still not heard, check that
fully charged batteries are installed in the headphones.
19. 䉱 — Push to navigate menus.
Replacing The Remote Control Batteries
The remote control requires two AAA batteries for operation. To replace the batteries:
1. Locate the battery compartment on the back of the
remote, then slide the battery cover downward.
2. Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them
according to the polarity diagram shown.
3. Replace the battery compartment cover.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 407
Controls
The headphone power indicator and controls are located
on the right ear cup.
NOTE: The rear video system must be turned on before
sound can be heard from the headphones. To conserve
battery life, the headphones will automatically turn off
approximately three minutes after the rear video system
is turned off.
Changing the Audio Mode for Headphones
Rear Seat Entertainment Headphones
1 — Power Button
2 — Volume Control
3 — Channel Selection Switch
1. Ensure the Remote Control channel/screen selector
switch is in the same position as the headphone
selector switch.
4
408 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
5. To cancel out of the Mode Selection menu, push the
BACK button on the remote control.
• When both the headphone and the remote control
channel selector switches are on Channel 1, the Replacing The Headphone Batteries
Remote is controlling Channel 1 and the headphones
Each set of headphones requires two AAA batteries for
are tuned to the audio on Channel 1.
operation. To replace the batteries:
• When both the headphone and the remote control
channel selector switches are on Channel 2, the 1. Locate the battery compartment on the left ear cup of
the headphones, and then slide the battery cover
Remote is controlling Channel 2 and the headphones
downward.
are tuned to the audio on Channel 2.
2. Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them
2. Push the SOURCE button on the remote control.
according to the polarity diagram shown.
3. Pushing the SOURCE button will advance to the next
3. Replace the battery compartment cover.
mode.
4. When the Mode Selection menu appears on screen, Unwired Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited
use the cursor buttons on the remote control to navi- Warranty
NOTE:
gate to the available modes and push the OK button to Who Does This Warranty Cover? This warranty covers
select the new mode.
the initial user or purchaser (⬙you⬙ or ⬙your⬙) of this
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 409
particular Unwired Technology LLC (⬙Unwired⬙) wire- FOR ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT,
less headphone (⬙Product⬙). The warranty is not transfer- INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY, PUNITIVE OR OTHER DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR
able.
NATURE WHATSOEVER. Some states and jurisdictions
How Long Does the Coverage Last? This warranty lasts
may not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or
as long as you own the Product.
consequential damages, so the above limitation may not
What Does This Warranty Cover? Except as specified apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal
below, this warranty covers any Product that in normal rights. You may also have other rights, which vary from
use is defective in workmanship or materials.
jurisdiction to jurisdiction.
What Does This Warranty Not Cover? This warranty
does not cover any damage or defect that results from
misuse, abuse or modification of the Product other than
by Unwired. Foam earpieces, which will wear over time
through normal use, are specifically not covered (replacement foam is available for a nominal charge). UNWIRED
TECHNOLOGY IS NOT LIABLE FOR ANY INJURIES
OR DAMAGES TO PERSONS OR PROPERTY RESULTING FROM THE USE OF, OR ANY FAILURE OR DEFECT IN, THE PRODUCT, NOR IS UNWIRED LIABLE
What Will Unwired Do? Unwired, at its option, will
repair or replace any defective Product. Unwired reserves the right to replace any discontinued Product with
a comparable model. THIS WARRANTY IS THE SOLE
WARRANTY FOR THIS PRODUCT, SETS FORTH YOUR
EXCLUSIVE REMEDY REGARDING DEFECTIVE
PRODUCTS, AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES (EXPRESS OR IMPLIED), INCLUDING ANY
WARRANTY OR MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
4
410 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If you have any questions or comments regarding your Display Settings
Unwired wireless headphones, please phone 1-888-293-3332
or email customersupport@unwiredtechnology.com.
You may register your Unwired wireless headphones by
phone at 1-888-293-3332.
System Information
Disc Menu
When listening to a CD Audio or CD Data disc, pushing
the remote control’s POP UP/MENU button displays a
list of all commands which control playback of the disc.
Video Screen Display Settings
When watching a video source (Blu-ray Disc or DVD
Video with the disc in Play mode, Aux Video, etc.),
pushing the remote control’s SETUP button activates the
Display Settings menu. These settings control the appearance of the video on the screen. The factory default
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 411
settings are already set for optimum viewing, so there is • Close the video screen.
no need to change these settings under normal circum• To change the current audio mode, push the remote
stances.
control’s SOURCE button. This will automatically select the next available audio mode without using the
To change the settings, push the remote control’s navigaMode/Source Select menu.
tion buttons (䉱, 䉲) to select an item, then push the
remote control’s navigation buttons (䉴, 䉳) to change the
• When the screen is reopened, the video screen will
value for the currently selected item. To reset all values
automatically turn back on and show the appropriate
back to the original settings, select the Default Settings
display menu or media.
menu option and push the remote control’s ENTER/OK
If the screen is closed and there is no audio heard, verify
button.
that the headphones are turned on (the ON indicator is
Disc Features control the remote Blu-ray Disc player’s
illuminated) and the headphone selector switch is on the
settings of DVD being watched in the remote player.
desired channel. If the headphones are turned on, push
the remote control’s power button to turn audio on. If
Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed
audio is still not heard, check that fully charged batteries
To listen to only audio portion of the channel with the
are installed in the headphones.
screen closed:
• Set the audio to the desired source and channel.
4
412 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Disc Formats
DVD Audio Support
The Blu-ray Disc player is capable of the playing the When a DVD-Audio disc is inserted in the Blu-ray Disc
following types of 4.7 in (12 cm) diameter discs :
player, the DVD-Audio title on the disc is played by
default (most DVD-Audio discs also have a Video title,
• BD: BDMV (Profile 1.1), BDAV (Profile 1.1)
but the Video title is ignored). All multi-channel program
• DVD: DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, AVCREC, AVCHD, material is automatically mixed down to two channels,
DVD-VR
which may result in a lowered apparent volume level. If
you increase the volume level to account for this change
• CD: CD-DA, VCD, CD-TEXT
in level, remember to lower the volume before changing
• DVD/CD: MP3, WMA, AAC, DivX (versions 3 – 6) the disc or to another mode.
profile 3.0
Recorded Discs
DVD Region Codes
The Blu-ray Disc player will play CD-R and CD-RW discs
The Blu-ray Disc player and many DVD discs are coded recorded in CD-Audio or Video-CD format, or as a
by geographic region. These region codes must match in CD-ROM containing MP3 or WMA files. The player will
order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD also play DVD-Video content recorded to a DVD-R or
disc does not match the region code for the player, the DVD-RW disc. DVD-ROM discs (either pressed or redisc will not play.
corded) are not supported.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 413
If you record a disc using a personal computer, there may
be cases where the Blu-ray Disc player may not be able to
play some or the entire disc, even if it is recorded in a
compatible format and is playable on other players. To
help avoid playback problems, use the following guidelines when recording discs.
• Mixed media recordable DVD formats will only play
the Video_TS portion of the disc.
If you are still having trouble writing a disc that is
playable in the Blu-ray Disc player, check with the disc
recording software publisher for more information about
burning playable discs.
• Open sessions are ignored. Only sessions that are
The recommended method for labeling recordable discs
closed are playable.
(CD-R, CD-RW, and DVD-R) is with a permanent marker.
• For multi-session CDs that contain only multiple CD- Do not use adhesive labels as they may separate from the
Audio sessions, the player will renumber the tracks so disc, become stuck, and cause permanent damage to the
each track number is unique.
DVD player.
• For CD Data (or CD-ROM) discs, always use the Compressed Audio Files (MP3 and WMA)
ISO-9660 (Level 1 or Level 2), Joliet, or Romeo format.
The Blu-ray Disc player is capable of playing MP3
Other formats (such as UDF, HFS, or others) are not
(MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3) and WMA (Windows Media
supported.
Audio) files from a CD Data disc (usually a CD-R or
• The player recognizes a maximum of 512 files and 99 CD-RW).
folders per CD-R and CD-RW disc.
4
414 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• The Blu-ray Disc player always uses the file extension • If you are creating your own files, the recommended
to determine the audio format, so MP3 files must
fixed bit rate for MP3 files is between 96 and 192Kbps
and the recommended fixed bit rate for WMA files is
always end with the extension ⬙.mp3⬙ or ⬙.MP3⬙ and
between 64 and 192Kbps. Variable bit rates are also
WMA files must always end with the extension ⬙.wma⬙
supported. For both formats, the recommended
or ⬙.WMA⬙. To prevent incorrect playback, do not use
these extensions for any other types of files.
sample rate is either 44.1kHz or 48kHz.
• For MP3 files, only version 1 ID3 tag data (such as • To change the current file, use the remote control’s or
artist name, track title, album, etc.) are supported.
Blu-ray Disc player’s 䉱 button to advance to the next
file, or the 䉲 button to return to the start of the current
• Any file that is copy protected (such as those downor previous file.
loaded from many online music stores) will not play.
The Blu-ray player will automatically skip the file and Disc Errors
begin playing the next available file.
If the Blu-ray Disc player is unable to read the disc, a
• Other compression formats such as AAC, MP3 Pro, ⬙Disc Error⬙ message is displayed on the rear screen and
Ogg Vorbis, and ATRAC3 will not play. The Blu-ray Radio displays. A dirty, damaged, or incompatible disc
player will automatically skip the file and begin play- format are all potential causes for a ⬙Disc Error⬙ message.
ing the next available file.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 415
If a disc has a damaged track which results in audible or
visible errors that persists for two seconds, the Blu-ray
Disc player will attempt to continue playing the disc by
skipping forward one to three seconds at a time. If the
end of the disc is reached, the Blu-ray Disc player will
return to the beginning of the disc and attempt to play
the start of the first track.
Product Agreement
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is
intended for home or other limited viewing uses otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or
The Blu-ray Disc player may shut down during ex- disassembly is prohibited.
tremely hot conditions, such as when the vehicle’s inteDolby Digital and MLP Lossless Manufactured
rior temperature is above 120° F (48.9° C). When this under license from Dolby Laboratories. ⬙Dolby⬙, ⬙MLP
occurs, the player will display ⬙High Temp⬙ and will shut Lossless⬙, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
off the Rear Seat displays until a safe temperature is Dolby Laboratories. Confidential unpublished works.
reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics Copyright 1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories. All right
of the Blu-ray Disc player.
reserved.
4
416 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push-button in the center and controls the volume and
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
access the switches.
Pushing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SXM/
CD/AUX/VES, etc.).
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push-button in the center. The function of the left-hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering
Wheel)
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 417
The button located in the center of the left-hand control 2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
will tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in the radio preset button.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching the disc.
CD Player
Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next 4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
track on the CD. Pushing the bottom of the switch once
or anti-static sprays.
will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
after the current track begins to play.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays the 7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
too high.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coatTo keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
ing removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
precautions:
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the good disc before considering disc player service.
surface.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
4
418 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a
manner that the radio is 20 cm or further from the human
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
body.
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is found in radio frequency safety standards and recomnot harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does mendations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the community.
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy
not using Uconnect (if equipped).
emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy emitRADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
ted by wireless devices such as mobile phones. However,
the use of wireless radios may be restricted in some
USA/CANADA
situations or environments, such as aboard airplanes. If
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
you are unsure of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio for authorization before turning on the wireless radio.
is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits.
Regulatory And Safety Information
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 419
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation.
• If this equipment does cause harmful interference to
radio or television reception, which can be determined
by turning the equipment off and on, the user is
2. This device must accept any interference received,
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or
including interference that may cause undesired opmore of the following measures:
eration.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and
NOTE:
receiver.
• This equipment has been tested and found to comply
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio technician
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
for help.
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy
and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
4
420 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CLIMATE CONTROLS
General Overview
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to Buttons On The Faceplate
make you comfortable in all types of weather. This
The buttons on the faceplate are located below the
system can be operated through either the controls on the Uconnect screen.
instrument panel or through the Uconnect system display.
When the Uconnect system is in different modes (Radio,
Player, Settings, More, etc.), the driver and passenger
temperature settings will be indicated at the top of the
display.
Automatic Climate Controls — Buttons On The
Faceplate
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 421
Buttons On The Touchscreen
The buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
Uconnect system screen.
4
Uconnect 8.4 Automatic Temperature Controls — Buttons
On The Touchscreen
Uconnect 5.0 Automatic Temperature Controls — Buttons
On The Touchscreen
422 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both The Buttons On 4. AUTO Operation Button
The Faceplate And The Buttons On The Touchscreen)
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by
1. MAX A/C Button
adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing
Press and release to change the current setting, the this function will cause the system to switch between
indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic
this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to Operation” for more information.
switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator 5. Front Defrost Button
will turn off.
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to
2. A/C Button
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feaPress and release to change the current setting, the ture is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side
indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this window demist outlets. When the defrost button is
function again will cause the A/C operation to switch selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode
into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off. with maximum temperature settings for best windshield
and side window defrosting and defogging. Performing
3. Recirculation Button
this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual
Press and release to change the current setting, the mode. If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate
system will return the previous setting.
indicator illuminates when ON.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 423
6. Rear Defrost Button
CAUTION! (Continued)
Press and release this button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
An indicator will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 10 minutes.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
7. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
(Continued)
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and
slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow button
on the touchscreen for warmer temperature settings.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
automatically exit Sync.
4
424 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
8. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button
10. Blower Control
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and
slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow button
on the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air forced
through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds
available. Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode
to switch to manual operation. The speeds can be selected
using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or
buttons on the touchscreen as follows:
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
Blower Control Knob On The Faceplate
automatically exit Sync.
The blower speed increases as you turn the blower
9. SYNC
control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting.
Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower
Sync feature On/Off. The Sync indicator is illuminated control knob counterclockwise.
when this feature is enabled. Sync is used to synchronize
the passenger temperature setting with the driver tem- Button On The Touchscreen
perature setting. Changing the passenger temperature Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature. and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 425
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
warmer air from the floor outlets.
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
• Floor Mode
and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
• Panel Mode
amount of air is directed through the defrost
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
and side window demister outlets.
panel. Each of these outlets can be individu• Mix Mode
ally adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side
the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved
window demist outlets. This mode works best
up and down or side to side to regulate airflow
in cold or snowy conditions.
direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the
air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow 12. Climate Control OFF Button
from these outlets.
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control
• Bi-Level Mode
ON/OFF.
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
11. Modes
4
426 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
13. Driver Temperature Control Down Button
15. Temperature Control (5.0 Radio Only)
Provides the driver with independent temperature control. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the
temperature bar towards the blue arrow button on the
touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.
Press the temperature button on the touchscreen to
regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger
compartment. Moving the temperature bar into the red
area, indicates warmer temperatures. Moving the temperature bar into the blue area indicates cooler temperatures.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time. Climate Control Functions
14. Driver Temperature Control Up Button
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
system. When the air conditioning system is turned on,
cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into
the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C
button to turn off the air conditioning and manually
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time.
sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
Provides the driver with independent temperature control. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide
the temperature bar towards the red arrow button on the
touchscreen for warmer temperature settings.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 427
NOTE:
MAX A/C
• For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix, MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perforFloor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off, but mance.
the A/C system shall remain active to prevent fogging
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the
of the windows.
prior settings. The button on the touchscreen illuminates
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass, when MAX A/C is ON.
select Defrost mode and adjust blower speed if In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
needed.
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the prior
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (lo- settings and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
cated in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of Recirculation
dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
pressing the Recirculation control button. The
recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is
selected. Press the button a second time to turn off the
Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.
4
428 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may 2. Adjust the temperature you would like the system to
maintain by adjusting the driver and passenger temlead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation
perature buttons on the faceplate or buttons on the
feature may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen
touchscreen. Once the desired temperature is disgreyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging
played, the system will achieve and automatically
on the inside of the windshield. On systems with Manual
maintain that comfort level.
Climate Controls, the Recirculation mode is not allowed
in Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
Recirculation will be disabled automatically if this mode
not necessary to change the temperature. You will
is selected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in this
experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing
mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink
the system to function automatically.
and then turn off.
NOTE:
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings.
Automatic Operation
The system automatically adjusts the temperature,
mode, and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate or press the
as possible.
“AUTO” button on the touchscreen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 429
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
units by selecting the Uconnect customerprogrammable feature. Refer to the “Uconnect Settings” in this section of the manual.
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow
by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C
operation and Recirculation control can also be manually
selected in Manual operation.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain
on low until the engine warms up. The blower will
increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
NOTE: Each of these features operates independently
from each other. If any feature is controlled manually,
temperature control will continue to operate automatically.
Manual Operation Override
Operating Tips
The system allows for manual selection of blower speed, NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation con- suggested control settings for various weather conditrol.
tions.
The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at
a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This
allows the front occupants to control the volume of air
circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating.
A solution of 50% OAT (Organic Additive Technology)
4
430 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
coolant that meets the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS.90032 and 50% water is recommended.
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
Window Fogging
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side winWinter Operation
dow fogging becomes objectionable, increase blower
Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months
speed to improve airflow and clearing of the side winis not recommended because it may cause window
dows. Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild
fogging.
but rainy or humid weather.
Vacation Storage
NOTE:
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air • Recirculate without A/C should not be used for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure • Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will automatiadequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
cally adjust the climate control settings to reduce or
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
eliminate window fogging on the front windshield.
When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 431
Outside Air Intake
A/C Air Filter
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
The climate control system filters outside air containing
dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be
totally filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement instructions.
4
432 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 433
PERSONALIZED MENU BAR
1. Press the “Apps
” button to open the App screen.
The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar 2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App to replace
are easily changed for your convenience. Simply follow
an existing shortcut in the main menu bar.
these steps:
The replaced shortcut will now be an active App/
shortcut on the main menu bar.
4
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Main Menu
434 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and
tips you need to know to control your Uconnect 8.4A/
8.4AN system.
Uconnect 8.4AN
If you see the
icon on your touchscreen, you have
the Uconnect 8.4AN system. If not, you have a
Uconnect 8.4A system.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 435
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect system with your
voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and
feature compatibility and to find phone pairing instructions.
4
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conversations are examples of noise that may impact
recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while
facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned
on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Re-
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first ceive A Text
push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after 2 — For All Radios: Push To Begin Radio Or Media functions. For
8.4A/8.4AN Only: Push To Begin Navigation, Apps And Climate
the beep, then say your Voice Command.
Functions.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts 3 — Push To End Call
by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice
Command from current category.
436 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say:
• Cancel to stop a current voice session
• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touchscreen.
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 437
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM
Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say:
4
• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM
• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or
want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button
and say “Help.” The system will provide you with
a list of commands.
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Radio
438 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIP: Press the “browse” button on the touchscreen to see
all of the music on your iPod or USB device. Your Voice
Uconnect offers connections via USB, SD, Bluetooth and
Command must match exactly how the artist, album,
auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only
song and genre information is displayed.
available for connected USB and iPod devices. (Remote
CD player optional and not available on all vehicles.)
Media
. After the beep, say one of the
Push the VR button
following commands and follow the prompts to
switch your media source or choose an artist.
• Change source to Bluetooth
• Change source to iPod
• Change source to USB
• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play
song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Media
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 439
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy
with Uconnect. When the “phonebook” button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and
pairing instructions.
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone
button
and say “Call,” then pronounce the name
exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a
contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say
“Call John Smith work.”
4
. After the beep, say one of
Push the Phone button
the following commands:
• Call John Smith
• Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts
• Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)
• Call back (call previous incoming phone number)
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Phone
440 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect will announce incoming text messages. Push
and say Listen. (Must have comthe Phone button
patible mobile phone paired to Uconnect system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push
. After the beep, say: “Reply.”
the Phone button
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
I’ll call you
I need
See you in
later.
directions.
<number> of
minutes.
I’m on my way. Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost.
Thanks.
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementa2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat tion of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advanone of the pre-defined messages and follow the system tage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit
prompts.
UconnectPhone.com.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes.
Stuck in traffic.
See you later.
Start without
No.
I’ll be late.
me.
Okay.
Where are you?
I will be
<number>
Are you there
Call me.
minutes late.
yet?
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 441
Apple iPhone iOS 6 or later supports reading incoming TIP: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with iPhone, but
text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple if your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can
iPhone, follow these 4 simple steps:
use your voice to send a text message.
4
iPhone Notification Settings
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Select “Settings”
Select “Bluetooth”
Select the (i) for the paired vehicle
Turn on “Show Notifications”
442 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Climate (8.4A/8.4AN)
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures handsfree and keep everyone comfortable while you keep
moving ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate
control.)
. After the beep, say one of the
Push the VR button
following commands:
• Set driver temperature to 70 degrees
• Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees
TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to
adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice
Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or
steering wheel if equipped.
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Climate
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 443
Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN)
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and
become more productive when you know exactly how to
get to where you want to go. (Navigation is optional on
the Uconnect 8.4A system. See your dealer to activate
navigation at any time.)
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
the beep, say:
4
. After
• For the 8.4A Uconnect System, say: “Enter state.”
• For the 8.4AN Uconnect System, say: “Find address
800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan.”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button
the beep, say: “ Find nearest coffee shop.”
. After
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Navigation
444 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Uconnect Access (8.4A/8.4AN)
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
Alaska and Hawaii. Services can only be used where
coverage is available; see coverage map for details.
9-1-1 Call
Security Alarm Notification
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
NOTE: Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber.
Remote Vehicle Start**
An included trial and/or subscription is required to take
advantage of the Uconnect Access services in the next
section of this guide. To register with Uconnect Access,
press the Apps button on the 8.4-inch touchscreen to get
started. Detailed registration instructions can be found
on the next page.
Yelp Search
Remote Horn and Lights
Voice Texting
Roadside Assistance Call
WiFi Hotspot***
**If vehicle is equipped.
NOTE: Uconnect Access is available only on equipped
***Extra charges apply.
vehicles purchased within the continental United States,
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 445
Vehicle Health Alert
Your vehicle will send you an email alert if it senses a
problem under the hood with one of your vehicles key
systems. For further information go to the Mopar Owner
Connect website moparownerconnect.com.
4
Register (8.4A/8.4AN)
To unlock the full potential of Uconnect Access in your
vehicle, you first need to register with Uconnect Access.
1. Push the ASSIST button on your rearview mirror.
Assist Button
2. Press the “Uconnect Care” button on the touchscreen.
3. A helpful Uconnect Care Agent will register your
vehicle and handle all of the details.
446 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Signing up is easy! Simply follow the steps above. Or,
” button on the touchscreen to
press the “Apps
“Register By Web” to complete the process using your
smartphone or computer.
For further information, please visit DriveUconnect.com.
Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN)
You’re only a few steps away from using remote commands and playing your favorite music in your vehicle.
Mobile App
To link your internet radio accounts:
1. Download the Uconnect Access App to your mobile
device.
2. Press the Via Mobile icon on the navigation bar at the
bottom of the app.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 447
3. Press the app you’d like to connect to your vehicle.
Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN)
. After
4. Enter your login information for the selected app and 1. To send a message, push the Phone button
the beep, say the following command: “Send mespress Link.
sage to John Smith.”
5. Next time you’re in your vehicle, enable Bluetooth,
pair your phone and select the Via Mobile app you 2. Listen to the prompt. After the beep, dictate the
message you would like to send. Wait for Uconnect to
want to play from the Uconnect touchscreen to stream
process your message.
your personalized music.
3. The Uconnect system will repeat your message and
provide a variety of options to add to, delete, send or
• You can also complete this process on the web. Simply
hear the message again. After the beep, tell Uconnect
visit moparownerconnect.com log in and click Set Up
what you’d like to do. For instance, if you’re happy
Via Mobile Profile (under Quick Links).
with your message, after the beep, say: “Send.”
• Once you download the app to your compatible You must be registered with Uconnect Access and have a
mobile device, you will also be able to start your compatible MAP – enabled smartphone to use your voice
vehicle and lock/unlock its doors from virtually any- to send a personalized text message. For details about
where.
MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com.
NOTE:
4
448 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Apple iPhone iOS6 or later supports reading incoming TIP:
text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple
• Voice Texting is not compatible with iPhone, but if
iPhone, follow these 4 simple steps:
your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can
use your voice to send a text message.
• Messages are limited to 140 characters.
• The Messaging button on the touchscreen must be
illuminated to use the feature.
iPhone Notification Settings
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Select “Settings”
Select “Bluetooth”
Select the (i) for the paired vehicle
Turn on “Show Notifications”
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 449
TIP: Once you perform a search, you can reorganize the
results by selecting either the Best Match, Rating or
Once registered with Uconnect Access, you can use your
Distance tab on the top of the touchscreen display.
voice to search for the most popular places or things
around you.
Yelp (8.4A/8.4AN)
1. Press the “Apps
” button on the touchscreen.
4
2. Press the “Yelp” button on the touchscreen.
3. Once the YELP home screen appears on the touch, then say: “YELP
screen, push the VR button
search.”
4. Listen to the system prompts and after the beep, tell
Uconnect the place or business that you’d like
Uconnect to find.
Yelp
450 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4A/8.4AN)
Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings,
check a sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast?
SiriusXM Travel Link is a suite of services that brings a
wealth of information right to your Uconnect 8.4AN
system. (Not available for 8.4A system.)
. After the beep, say one of the
Push the VR button
following commands:
• Show fuel prices
• Show 5 - day weather forecast
• Show extended weather
SiriusXM Travel Link
Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped
TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice ComIf your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can
mand.
use your voice to send text messages, schedule meetings,
set reminders, and more. For further information go to
the
Mopar
Owner
Connect
website
moparownerconnect.com.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 451
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be selected
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from so you can still place a second call without being interincoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes rupted by incoming calls.
on the road and hands on the wheel. For your conve- NOTE:
nience, there is a counter display to keep track of your
• Reply with text message is not compatible with
missed calls and text messages while you were using Do
iPhones.
Not Disturb.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text • Auto reply with text message is only available on
phones that supporting Bluetooth MAP.
message, a call or both, when declining an incoming call
Do Not Disturb
and send it to voicemail.
General Information
Automatic reply messages can be:
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
• “I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly.” Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
• Create a custom auto reply message up to 160 charac1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
ters.
NOTE: Only the first 25 characters can been seen on the 2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undetouchscreen while typing a custom message.
sired operation.
4
452 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
Additional Information
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
© 2015 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a
trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Yelp,
Yelp logo, Yelp burst and related marks are registered
• The term IC before the certification/registration num- trademarks of Yelp.
ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical speciFor Uconnect system support, call: 1-877-855-8400 (24
fications were met.
hours a day 7 days a week) or visit DriveUconnect.com.
Uconnect Access services support, call: 1-855-792-4241
Please have your Uconnect Security PIN ready when you
call.
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition . . . . . . . . . . .460
▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
(Below –22°F Or −30°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
▫ Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
▫ To Start The Engine While In Autostop
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
▫ To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
▫ To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
▫ System Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
䡵 STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .464 䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .468
▫ Automatic Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
5
454 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . .468 䡵 SELEC-TERRAIN — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . .490
▫ Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
▫ Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .470
▫ Driver Information Display (DID) Messages . . .492
▫ Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471 䡵 QUADRA-LIFT — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . .492
▫ Eight–Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . .472
▫ Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
䡵 SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . .482
▫ Air Suspension Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
䡵 FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION . . . . . . . . .482
▫ Driver Information Display (DID) Messages . . .497
▫ Quadra-Trac I Operating Instructions/
Precautions — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
䡵 ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS . . . . .
▫ Quadra-Trac II Operating Instructions/
䡵 OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS . . . .
Precautions — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
▫ Quadra-Lift — If Equipped. . . .
▫ Shift Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
▫ When To Use 4WD LOW Range
▫ Shifting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Quadra-Drive II System — If Equipped . . . . . .489
. . . . . . . . . . .499
. . . . . . . . . . .499
. . . . . . . . . . .502
—
. . . . . . . . . . .503
STARTING AND OPERATING 455
▫ Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . .513
▫ Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand . . . . . . . . . .505
▫ Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light. . . . . . . . . . . .514
▫ Hill Climbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
▫ Traction Downhill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
▫ After Driving Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .519
䡵 ELECTRIC POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .519
䡵 FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ENGINE
ONLY — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . .524
䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .512
▫ Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) . . . .512
▫ Brake System Warning Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
▫ Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
▫ Ready Alert Braking (RAB). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
▫ Rain Brake Support (RBS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
▫ Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) . . . . . . . . . . .525
▫ Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped . . .526
▫ Selec Speed Control (SSC) — If Equipped . . . .529
5
456 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .537
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .539
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .540 䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .557
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .545 䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .559
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545 䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM
(TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
▫ Premium System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .548
▫ Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
▫ Service TPM System Warning . . . . . . .
▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
. . . . . .560
. . . . . .563
. . . . . .564
. . . . . .565
. . . . . .566
STARTING AND OPERATING 457
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567 䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
▫ 3.6L Engine — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567
▫ Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
▫ 5.7L Engine — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568 䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . .578
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .569
▫ Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . .583
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .571
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .572
䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573
▫ Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release. . . . . . . . .575
▫ Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover Removal
(Summit Models) — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . .584
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .586
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591
䡵 SNOW PLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .592
5
458 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . .593
▫ Recreational Towing – Two-Wheel Drive
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594
▫ Recreational Towing — Quadra-Trac I
(Single-Speed Transfer Case) Four-Wheel
Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
▫ Recreational Towing — Quadra–Trac II
/Quadra–Drive II Four-Wheel Drive Models . .596
STARTING AND OPERATING 459
STARTING PROCEDURES
WARNING! (Continued)
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic
transmission into PARK and apply the parking
brake. Always make sure the keyless ignition node
is in the “OFF” mode, remove the Key Fob from the
vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in
a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
(Continued)
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.
A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
5
460 STARTING AND OPERATING
Automatic Transmission
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition
The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting into any driving gear.
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push
of a button, as long as the Remote
Start/Keyless Enter-N-Go Key Fob is
in the passenger compartment.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
Normal Starting
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
STARTING AND OPERATING 461
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the
vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will
disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, push the button again.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and release
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE
START/STOP button must be held for two seconds or
three short pushes in a row with the vehicle speed
above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine will shut off.
The ignition switch position will remain in the ACC
position until the gear selector is in PARK and the
button is pushed twice to the OFF position. If the gear
selector is not in PARK and the ENGINE START/
STOP button is pushed once, the Driver Information
Display (DID) will display a “Vehicle Not In Park”
message and the engine will remain running. Never
leave a vehicle out of the PARK position, or it could
roll.
NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in
PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30
minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
OFF position.
5
462 STARTING AND OPERATING
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With
Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
NEUTRAL Position)
• Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to
return the ignition to the OFF position (DID will
display “OFF”).
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has four positions, OFF, ACC, RUN
and START. To change the ignition positions without
starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these
steps:
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –22°F Or −30°C)
• Starting with the ignition in the OFF position,
If Engine Fails To Start
• Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to place
the ignition to the ACC position (DID will display
“ACC”),
• Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to place the ignition to the RUN position (DID will
display “ON/RUN”),
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 463
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer
to “Jump-Starting” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button)
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel:
1. Press and hold the brake pedal.
2. Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
hold it.
3. Push and release the ENGINE START/STOP button
once.
The starter motor will engage automatically, run for 10
seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs, release
the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15
seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
5
464 STARTING AND OPERATING
After Starting
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following Must
Occur:
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
• The system must be in STOP/START READY state. A
STOP/START READY message will be displayed in
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
the Driver Information Display (DID) within the Stop/
Start section. Refer to “Driver Information Display
The Stop/Start function was developed to reduce fuel
(DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
consumption. The system will stop the engine automatifurther information.
cally during a vehicle stop if the required conditions are
met. Releasing the brake pedal or pressing the accelerator • The vehicle must be completely stopped.
pedal will automatically restart the engine.
• The shifter must be in a forward gear and the brake
Automatic Mode
pedal depressed.
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every
normal customer engine start. At that time, the
system will go into STOP/START READY and
if all other conditions are met, can go into a
STOP/START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE “Autostop” mode.
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will move to
the zero position and the Stop/Start telltale will illuminate indicating you are in Autostop. Customer settings
will be maintained upon return to an engine running
condition.
STARTING AND OPERATING 465
• HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower
speed.
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many
safety and comfort conditions to see if they are fulfilled. • HVAC set to MAX A/C.
Detailed information about the operation of the Stop/
Start system may be viewed in the DID Stop/Start • Engine has not reached normal operating temperature.
Screen. In the following situations, the engine will not • The transmission is not in a forward gear.
stop:
• Hood is open.
• Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
• Vehicle is in 4LO transfer case mode.
• Driver’s door is not closed.
• Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient pressure.
• Battery temperature is too warm or cold.
Other Factors Which Can Inhibit Autostop Include:
• Battery charge is low.
• Accelerator pedal input.
• The vehicle is on a steep grade.
• Engine temp too high.
• Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an accept• 5 MPH threshold not achieved from previous AUable cabin temperature has not been achieved.
TOSTOP.
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not Autostop
5
466 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Steering angle beyond threshold.
• ACC is on and speed is set.
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start Automatically While In Autostop Mode:
• The transmission selector is moved out of DRIVE.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several
times without the STOP/START system going into a • To maintain cabin temperature comfort.
STOP/START READY state under more extreme condi• HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
tions of the items listed above.
• HVAC system temperature or fan speed is manually
To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode
adjusted.
While in a forward gear, the engine will start when the
brake pedal is released or the throttle pedal is depressed. • Battery voltage drops too low.
The transmission will automatically re-engage upon en- • Low brake vacuum (e.g. after several brake pedal
gine restart.
applications).
• STOP/START OFF switch is pressed.
• A STOP/START system error occurs.
• 4WD system is put into 4LO mode.
STARTING AND OPERATING 467
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System
Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off the STOP/
START system), the engine will not be stopped.
4. The STOP/START system will reset itself back to an
ON condition every time the ignition is turned off and
back on.
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System
Push the STOP/START OFF switch (located on the
switch bank). The light on the switch will turn off.
System Malfunction
If there is a malfunction in the STOP/START system, the
STOP/START Off Switch
1. Push the STOP/START OFF switch (located on the system will not shut down the engine. A “SERVICE
switch bank). The light on the switch will illuminate. STOP/START SYSTEM” message will appear in the
Driver Information Display (DID). Refer to “Driver In2. The “STOP/START OFF” message will appear in formation Display (DID)“ in “Understanding Your InDriver Information Display (DID). Refer to “Driver strument Panel” for further information.
5
468 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message appears in the DID, have the system checked by your
authorized dealer.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
WARNING!
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
The engine block heater cord is located:
• 3.6L Engine — Coiled and strapped to the engine oil
dipstick tube.
• 5.7L Engine — Bundled and fastened to the injector
harness.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 469
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
and make sure the keyless ignition node is in the
ⴖOFFⴖ mode. Remove the Key Fob from the vehicle,
and lock the vehicle. When the keyless ignition is
in the OFF mode, the transmission is locked in
PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in the “OFF” mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock the
vehicle.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A
child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
5
470 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
engine can be turned off. This helps the driver avoid
inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing the
transmission in PARK.
This system also locks the transmission in PARK whenever the ignition switch is in the OFF position.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the gear selector in
PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission out of PARK, the engine must be running and the
brake pedal must be pressed.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from
shifting out of PARK.
NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is
Ignition Park Interlock
stopped or moving at low speeds.
This vehicle is equipped with a Ignition Park Interlock
which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the
STARTING AND OPERATING 471
Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode
The Fuel Economy (ECO) mode can improve the vehicle’s overall fuel economy during normal driving conditions. Push the “ECO” switch in the center stack of the
instrument panel to activate or disable ECO mode. An
amber light on the switch indicates when ECO mode is
disabled.
5
Fuel Economy Mode Switch
When the Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode is engaged, the
vehicle control systems will change the following:
• The transmission will upshift sooner and downshift
later.
472 STARTING AND OPERATING
• The overall driving performance will be more conser- Eight–Speed Automatic Transmission
vative.
The transmission gear range (PRNDM) is displayed both
• Vehicles with Quadra-Lift air suspension will operate on the gear selector bezel and in the Driver Information
in ⬙Aero⬙ mode over a broader speed range. Refer to Display (DID). To select a gear range, press the lock
⬙Quadra-Lift⬙ in ⬙Starting And Operating⬙ for further button on the gear selector and move the lever rearward
or forward. You must also press the brake pedal to shift
information.
the transmission out of PARK, or to shift from NEUTRAL
• Some ECO mode functions may be temporarily inhib- into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or
ited based on temperature and other factors.
moving at low speeds (refer to “Brake/Transmission
Shift Interlock System” in this section). Select the DRIVE
Active Noise Cancellation — Summit And SRT
range for normal driving.
Models Only
Your vehicle is equipped with an Active Noise Cancellation System. This system uses four microphones embedded in the headliner to detect undesirable exhaust noise,
which sometimes occurs when operating in ECO mode.
An onboard frequency generator creates counteracting
sound waves through the audio system to help keep the
vehicle quiet.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
STARTING AND OPERATING 473
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
shifting between these gears.
The transmission gear selector provides PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE and MANUAL (AutoStick)
shift positions. Manual shifts can be made using the
AutoStick shift control (refer to “AutoStick” in this
section for further information). Toggling the gear selector forward (-) or rearward (+) while in the MANUAL
(AutoStick) position (beside the DRIVE position), or
tapping the shift paddles (+/-), will manually select the
Gear Selector
transmission gear, and will display the current gear in the
NOTE: If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK,
instrument cluster.
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward), it is probably in the AutoStick (+/-) position
(beside the DRIVE position). In AutoStick mode, the
transmission gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the
instrument cluster. Move the gear selector to the right
5
474 STARTING AND OPERATING
(into the DRIVE [D] position) for access to PARK, RE- When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
VERSE, and NEUTRAL.
brake.
Gear Ranges
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precauNEUTRAL into another gear range.
tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
NOTE: On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
transfer case is in a drive position.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 475
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
transmission gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission
is in PARK before leaving the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the Key Fob.
When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the Key Fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
(Continued)
(Continued)
5
476 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A
child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
• Before moving the gear selector out of PARK, you
must start the engine, and also press the brake
pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector could
result.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK position:
• When shifting into PARK, press the lock button on the
gear selector and push the lever all the way forward
until it stops and is fully seated.
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).
• With brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector
will not move out of PARK.
NOTE: If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK
position (when pushed forward), it is probably in the
AutoStick (+/-) position (beside the DRIVE position). In
AutoStick mode, the transmission gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is
displayed in the instrument cluster. Move the gear selector to the right (into the DRIVE [D] position) for access to
PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
STARTING AND OPERATING 477
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. Apply the parking
brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must DRIVE (D)
leave the vehicle.
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downWARNING!
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characterispractices that limit your response to changing traffic tics under all normal operating conditions.
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
5
478 STARTING AND OPERATING
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick shift
control (refer to ⬙AutoStick⬙ in this section for further
information) to select a lower gear. Under these conditions, using a lower gear will improve performance and
extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting
and heat buildup.
During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F [-30°C] or
below), transmission operation may be modified depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as
vehicle speed. Normal operation will resume once the
transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.
MANUAL (M)
The MANUAL (M, +/-) position (beside the DRIVE
position) enables full manual control of transmission
shifting (also known as AutoStick mode; refer to
“AutoStick” in this section for further information). Toggling the gear selector forward (-) or rearward (+) while
in the MANUAL (AutoStick) position will manually
select the transmission gear, and will display the current
gear in the instrument cluster.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may
operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all.
Vehicle performance may be severely degraded and the
engine may stall. In some situations, the transmission
may not re-engage if the engine is turned off and
restarted. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be
illuminated. A message in the instrument cluster will
inform the driver of the more serious conditions, and
indicate what actions may be necessary.
STARTING AND OPERATING 479
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission 6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
following steps:
operation.
NOTE: In cases where the instrument cluster message
indicates the transmission may not re-engage after engine shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired
location (preferably, at your authorized dealer).
1. Stop the vehicle.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not,
service is required.
shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
AutoStick
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the engine
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature
turns OFF.
providing manual shift control, giving you more control
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine
braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
5. Restart the engine.
and improve overall vehicle performance. This system
5
480 STARTING AND OPERATING
can also provide you with more control during passing, next lower gear. Tapping the lever rearward (+) (or
city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, tapping the (+) shift paddle) will command an upshift.
trailer towing, and many other situations.
NOTE: The shift paddles may be disabled (or re-enabled,
as desired) using the Uconnect Personal Settings.
Operation
To activate AutoStick mode, move the gear selector into
the MANUAL (M) position (beside the DRIVE position),
or tap one of the shift paddles on the steering wheel.
Tapping the (-) shift paddle to enter AutoStick mode will
downshift the transmission to the next lower gear, while
tapping (+) to enter AutoStick mode will retain the
current gear. The current transmission gear will be displayed in the instrument cluster. In AutoStick mode, you
can use the gear selector (in the MANUAL position), or
the shift paddles, to manually shift the transmission.
Tapping the gear selector forward (-) while in the
MANUAL (M) position, or tapping the (-) shift paddle on
the steering wheel, will downshift the transmission to the
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up or
down when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver
(using the gear selector, or the shift paddles), unless an
engine lugging or overspeed condition would result. It
will remain in the selected gear until another upshift or
downshift is chosen, except as described below.
• The transmission will automatically downshift as the
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
display the current gear.
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
vehicle is accelerated.
STARTING AND OPERATING 481
• You can start out, from a stop, in first or second gear
(or third gear, in 4LO range, Snow mode, or Sand
mode). Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow starting in
second gear. Starting out in second gear can be helpful
in snowy or icy conditions.
NOTE: When Selec-Speed or Hill Descent Control is
enabled, AutoStick is not active.
To disengage AutoStick, return the gear selector to the
DRIVE position, or press and hold the (+) shift paddle (if
the gear selector is already in DRIVE) until ⬙D⬙ is once
• If a requested downshift would cause the engine to again indicated in the instrument cluster. You can shift in
over-speed, that shift will not occur.
or out of AutoStick at any time without taking your foot
off the accelerator pedal.
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low
of a vehicle speed.
• Holding the (-) paddle depressed will downshift the
transmission to the lowest gear possible at the current
speed.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick is enabled.
• The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a
fault or overheat condition is detected.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
5
482 STARTING AND OPERATING
ABS and Traction Control, provides resistance to any
wheel that is slipping to allow additional torque transfer
Your vehicle is equipped with a Sport Mode feature. This
to wheels with traction.
mode is a configuration set up for typical enthusiast
driving. The engine, transmission, and steering systems NOTE: The Quadra-Trac I system is not appropriate for
are all set to their SPORT settings. Sport Mode will conditions where 4WD LOW range is recommended.
provide improved throttle response and modified shift- Refer to “Off-Road Driving Tips” in “Starting And Oping for an enhanced driving experience, as well the erating” for further information.
greatest amount of steering feel. This mode may be
Quadra-Trac II Operating Instructions/Precautions
activated and deactivated by pushing the Sport button on
— If Equipped
the instrument panel switch bank.
The Quadra-Trac II transfer case is fully automatic in the
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
normal driving 4WD AUTO mode. The Quadra-Trac II
Quadra-Trac I Operating Instructions/Precautions transfer case provides three mode positions:
— If Equipped
• 4WD HI
SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED
The Quadra-Trac I is a single-speed (HI range only) • NEUTRAL
transfer case, which provides convenient full-time fourwheel drive. No driver interaction is required. The Brake • 4WD LOW
Traction Control (BTC) System, which combines standard This transfer case is fully automatic in the 4WD HI mode.
STARTING AND OPERATING 483
When additional traction is required, the 4WD LOW Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
position can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
together and force the front and rear wheels to rotate at speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
the same speed. The 4WD LOW position is intended for
loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD
WARNING!
LOW position on dry, hard-surfaced roads may cause
increased tire wear and damage to driveline components. You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the
speed is approximately three times that of the 4WD HI parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position
position at a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed disengages both the front and rear drive shafts from
the engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll,
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends even if the transmission is in PARK. The parking
on tires of equal size, type, and circumference on each brake should always be applied when the driver is
wheel. Any difference will adversely affect shifting and not in the vehicle.
cause damage to the transfer case.
5
484 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shift Positions
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
4WD system mode position, see the information below:
4WD AUTO
This range is used on surfaces such as ice, snow, gravel,
sand, and dry hard pavement.
NOTE: Refer to “Selec-Terrain – If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for further information on the various positions and their intended usages.
NEUTRAL
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the power transfer unit
in the NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully
engaging the parking brake. The NEUTRAL (N)
position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle
to roll, even if the automatic transmission is in PARK
(or manual transmission is in gear). The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
This range disengages the driveline from the powertrain. 4WD LOW
It is to be used for flat towing behind another vehicle.
This range is for low speed four-wheel drive. It provides
Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operatan additional gear reduction which allows for increased
ing” for further information.
torque to be delivered to both the front and rear wheels
STARTING AND OPERATING 485
while providing maximum pulling power for loose,
slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
NOTE: Refer to “Selec-Terrain – If Equipped” for further
information on the various positions and their intended
usages.
Shifting Procedures
5
4WD HI To 4WD LOW
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h), the
ignition switch in the ON position or the engine running,
shift the transmission into “N”, and push the “4WD
LOW” button once on the transfer case switch. The “4WD
LOW” indicator light in the instrument cluster will begin
to flash and remain on solid when the shift is complete.
Transfer Case Switch
486 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, or a NOTE:
transfer case motor temperature protection condition
• If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, or a transfer
exists, a “For 4x4 Low Slow Below 3 mph (5 km/h) Put
case motor temperature protection condition exists, a
Trans in “N” Press 4 Low” message will flash from the
“For 4x4 High Slow Below 3 mph (5 km/h) Put Trans
Driver Information Display (DID). Refer to “Driver Inin N push 4 Low” message will flash from the Driver
formation Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your InInformation Display (DID). Refer to “Driver Informastrument Panel” for further information.
tion Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
4WD LOW To 4WD HI
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h), the • Shifting into or out of 4WD LOW is possible with the
ignition switch in the ON position or the engine running,
vehicle completely stopped; however, difficulty may
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL, and push the
occur due to the mating clutch teeth not being prop“4WD LOW” button once on the transfer case switch. The
erly aligned. Several attempts may be required for
“4WD LOW” indicator light in the instrument cluster
clutch teeth alignment and shift completion to occur.
will flash and go out when the shift is complete.
The preferred method is with the vehicle rolling 0 to
3 mph (0 to 5 km/h). If the vehicle is moving faster
than 3 mph (5 km/h), the transfer case will not allow
the shift.
STARTING AND OPERATING 487
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging
the parking brake. The NEUTRAL (N) position disengages both the front and rear drive shafts from the
powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if
the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is not in
the vehicle.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, with the engine
running.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
4. If vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift air suspension, ensure the vehicle is set to Normal Ride Height.
5. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push and hold
the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL (N) button (located by the selector switch) for four seconds. The
light behind the NEUTRAL (N) symbol will blink,
indicating shift in progress. The light will stop blinking (stay on solid) when the shift to NEUTRAL (N) is
complete. A “NEUTRAL” message will appear in the
Driver Information Display (DID). Refer to “Driver
Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
5
488 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a “To
Tow Vehicle Safely, Read Neutral Shift Procedure in
Owners Manual” message will flash from the Driver
Information Display (DID). Refer to “Driver Information
Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL (N) Switch
2.
6. After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL (N)
3.
light stays on, release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
4.
7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
5.
8. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure
that there is no vehicle movement.
Firmly apply the parking brake.
Start the engine.
Press and hold the brake pedal.
Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
STARTING AND OPERATING 489
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push and hold 8. After the NEUTRAL (N) button has been released, the
the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL (N) button (lotransfer case will shift to the position indicated by the
selector switch.
cated by the selector switch) for one second.
Quadra-Drive II System — If Equipped
The optional Quadra-Drive II System features two torque
transfer couplings. The couplings include an Electronic
Limited-Slip Differential (ELSD) rear axle and the QuadraTrac II transfer case. The optional ELSD axle is fully automatic and requires no driver input to operate. Under normal
driving conditions, the unit functions as a standard axle,
balancing torque evenly between left and right wheels. With
a traction difference between left and right wheels, the
coupling will sense a speed difference. As one wheel begins
to spin faster than the other, torque will automatically
transfer from the wheel that has less traction, to the wheel
NEUTRAL (N) Switch
that has traction. While the transfer case and axle coupling
7. When the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turns off, differ in design, their operation is similar. Follow the
release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
Quadra-Trac II transfer case shifting information, preceding
this section, for shifting this system.
5
490 STARTING AND OPERATING
SELEC-TERRAIN — IF EQUIPPED
Selec-Terrain consists of the following positions:
• Snow – Tuning set for additional stability in inclement
weather. Use on and off road on loose traction surfaces
Selec-Terrain combines the capabilities of the vehicle
such as snow. When in Snow mode (depending on
control systems, along with driver input, to provide the
certain operating conditions), the transmission may
best performance for all terrains.
use second gear (rather than first gear) during
launches, to minimize wheel slippage. If equipped
with air suspension, the default ride height for Snow is
NRH.
Description
• Auto – Fully automatic full time four-wheel drive
operation can be used on and off road. Balances
traction with seamless steering feel to provide improved handling and acceleration over two-wheel
drive vehicles. If equipped with air suspension, the
level will change to NRH.
Selec-Terrain Switch
STARTING AND OPERATING 491
• Sand – Off road calibration for use on low traction • Rock – Off road calibration only available in 4WD Low
surfaces such as sand or wet grass. Driveline is maxirange. The vehicle is raised (if equipped with Air
Suspension) for improved ground clearance. Traction
mized for traction. Some binding may be felt on less
based tuning with improved steer-ability for use on
forgiving surfaces. The electronic brake controls are set
high traction off-road surfaces. Use for low speed
to limit traction control management of throttle and
wheel spin. If equipped with air suspension, the
obstacles such as large rocks, deep ruts, etc. If
equipped with air suspension, the vehicle level will
default ride height for Sand is NRH.
change to Off-Road 2. If the Selec-Terrain switch is in
• Mud – Off road calibration for use on low traction
ROCK mode, and the transfer case is switched from
surfaces such as mud. Driveline is maximized for
4WD Low to 4WD High, the Selec-Terrain system will
traction. Some binding may be felt on less forgiving
return to AUTO.
surfaces. The electronic brake controls are set to limit
traction control management of throttle and wheel NOTE: Activate the Hill Descent Control or Selec Speed
spin. If equipped with air suspension, the level will Control for steep downhill control. See “Electronic Brake
change to Off Road 1.
Control System” in this section for further information.
5
492 STARTING AND OPERATING
Driver Information Display (DID) Messages
When the appropriate conditions exist, a message will
appear in the DID display. Refer to “Driver Information
Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
QUADRA-LIFT — IF EQUIPPED
Description
The Quadra-Lift air suspension system provides full time
load leveling capability along with the benefit of vehicle
height adjustment by the push of a button.
Selec-Terrain Switch
1
2
3
4
5
6
—
—
—
—
—
—
Up Button
Down Button
Entry/Exit Mode Indicator Lamp (Customer Selectable)
Normal Ride Height Indicator Lamp (Customer Selectable)
Off-Road 1 Indicator Lamp (Customer Selectable)
Off-Road 2 Indicator Lamp (Customer Selectable)
STARTING AND OPERATING 493
• Normal Ride Height (NRH) – This is the standard
position of the suspension and is meant for normal
driving.
required. To enter OR2, push the “Up” button twice
from the NRH position or once from the OR1 position
while vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h). While
in OR2, if the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h)
the vehicle height will be automatically lowered to
OR1. Refer to “Off-Road Driving Tips” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
• Off-Road 1 (OR1) (Raises the vehicle approximately
1.1 in (28 mm) – This is the primary position for all
off-road driving until OR2 is needed. A smoother and
more comfortable ride will result. Push the “Up”
button once from the NRH position while the vehicle • Aero Mode (Lowers the vehicle approximately 0.6 in
(15 mm) – This position provides improved aerodyspeed is below 38 mph (61 km/h). When in the OR1
namics by lowering the vehicle. The vehicle will
position, if the vehicle speed remains between 40 mph
automatically enter Aero Mode when the vehicle
(64 km/h) and 50 mph (80 km/h) for greater than 20
speed remains between 52 mph (83 km/h) and 56 mph
seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds 50 mph
(90 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle
(80 km/h), the vehicle will be automatically lowered to
speed exceeds 56 mph (90 km/h). The vehicle will
NRH. Refer to “Off-Road Driving Tips” in “Starting
return to NRH from Aero Mode if the vehicle speed
And Operating” for further information.
remains between 20 mph (32 km/h) and 25 mph
(40 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle
• Off-Road 2 (OR2) (Raises the vehicle approximately
speed falls below 20 mph (32 km/h). The vehicle will
2.2 in (55 mm) – This position is intended for offenter Aero Mode, regardless of vehicle speed if the
roading use only where maximum ground clearance is
vehicle is in “SPORT” mode.
5
494 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Entry/Exit Mode (Lowers the vehicle approximately
1.6 in (40 mm) – This position lowers the vehicle for
easier passenger entry and exit as well as lowering the
rear of the vehicle for easier loading and unloading of
cargo. To enter Entry/Exit Mode, push the “Down”
button once from (NRH) while the vehicle speed is
below 25 mph (40 km/h). Once the vehicle speed goes
below 15 mph (24 km/h) the vehicle height will begin
to lower. If the vehicle speed remains between 15 mph
(24 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h) for greater than 60
seconds, or the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph
(40 km/h) the Entry/Exit Mode change will be cancelled. To exit Entry/Exit Mode, press the “Up” button
once while in Entry/Exit Mode or drive the vehicle
over 15 mph (24 km/h).
NOTE: Automatic lowering of the vehicle into Entry/
Exit Mode can be enabled through the Uconnect TouchScreen Radio. If this feature is enabled, the vehicle will
only lower if the gear selector is in ⬙PARK⬙, the terrain
switch is in ⬙AUTO⬙, the transfer-case is in ⬙AUTO” and
the vehicle level should be either in Normal or Aero
Mode. The Vehicle will not automatically lower if the air
suspension level is in Off Rd 2 or Off Rd 1. If the vehicle
is equipped with Intrusion Theft Module (ITM), the
lowering will be suppressed when the ignition is
switched Off and the Door is Open to prevent setting the
alarm Off.
The Selec-Terrain switch will automatically change the
vehicle to the proper height based on the position of the
Selec-Terrain switch. The height can be changed from the
default Selec-Terrain setting by normal use of the air
suspension buttons. Refer to “Selec-Terrain” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 495
The system requires that the engine be running for all
changes. When lowering the vehicle all of the doors,
including the liftgate, must be closed. If a door is opened
at any time while the vehicle is lowering the change will
not be completed until the open door(s) is closed.
To assist with changing a spare tire, the Quadra-Lift air
suspension system has a feature which allows the automatic leveling to be disabled. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
The Quadra-Lift air suspension system uses a lifting and
lowering pattern which keeps the headlights from incorrectly shining into oncoming traffic. When raising the
vehicle, the rear of the vehicle will move up first and then
the front. When lowering the vehicle, the front will move
down first and then the rear.
NOTE: If equipped with a touch screen radio all
enabling/disabling of air suspension features must be
done through the radio. Refer to “Uconnect Access
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
After the engine is turned off, it may be noticed that the
air suspension system operates briefly, this is normal. The
system is correcting the position of the vehicle to ensure
a proper appearance.
WARNING!
The air suspension system uses a high pressure
volume of air to operate the system. To avoid personal injury or damage to the system, see your
authorized dealer for service.
5
496 STARTING AND OPERATING
Air Suspension Modes
NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine
running.
The Air Suspension system has multiple modes to protect
the system in unique situations:
Wheel Alignment Mode
Before performing a wheel alignment this mode must be
enabled. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
To assist with changing a spare tire, the air suspension
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
system has a feature which allows the automatic leveling
to be disabled. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Under- NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information. running.
Tire/Jack Mode
NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine If equipped with a touch screen radio all enabling/
disabling of air suspension features must be done
running.
through the radio. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “UnTransport Mode
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informaTo assist with flat bed towing, the air suspension system tion.
has a feature which will put the vehicle into Entry/Exit
height and disable the automatic load leveling system.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 497
threshold, etc). The “UP” button can be pushed multiple
times, each push will raise the requested level by one
When the appropriate conditions exist, a message will
position up to a maximum position of OR2 or the highest
appear in the DID display. Refer to “Driver Information
position allowed based on current conditions (i.e. vehicle
Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
speed, etc).
Panel” for further information.
Pushing the “DOWN” button once will move the suspenOperation
sion one position lower from the current level, assuming
The indicator lamps 3 through 6 will illuminate to show all conditions are met (i.e. engine running, doors closed,
the current position of the vehicle. Flashing indicator speed below threshold, etc). The “DOWN” button can be
lamps will show a position which the system is working pressed multiple times. Each push will lower the reto achieve. When raising, if multiple indicator lamps are quested level by one position down to a minimum of
flashing on the “Up” button, the highest flashing indica- Park Mode or the lowest position allowed based on
tor lamp is the position the system is working to achieve. current conditions (i.e. vehicle speed, etc.)
When lowering, if multiple indicators are flashing on the
Automatic height changes will occur based on vehicle
⬙Up⬙ button the lowest solid indicator lamp is the posispeed and the current vehicle height. The indicator lamps
tion the system is working to achieve.
and DID messages will operate the same for automatic
Pushing the “UP” button once will move the suspension changes and user requested changes.
one position higher from the current position, assuming
all conditions are met (i.e. engine running, speed below
Driver Information Display (DID) Messages
5
498 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Off-Road 2 (OR2) – Indicator lamps 4, 5, and 6 will be
illuminated when the vehicle is in OR2.
• Off-Road 1 (OR1) – Indicator lamps 4 and 5 will be
illuminated when the vehicle is in OR1.
• Normal Ride Height (NRH) – Indicator lamp 4 will be
illuminated when the vehicle is in this position.
height change will be paused until the vehicle speed
either goes below 15 mph (24 km/h) and the height
change continues to Entry/Exit Mode, or exceeds
25 mph (40 km/h) and the vehicle height will return to
NRH. Entry/Exit Mode may be selected while the
vehicle is not moving provided that the engine is still
running and all doors remain closed.
• Entry/Exit Mode – Indicator lamp 3 will be illumi- • Transport Mode - No indicator lamps will be illuminated. Customer driving will disable Transport Mode.
nated when the vehicle is in Entry/Exit Mode. If
Entry/Exit Mode is requested while vehicle speed is
• Tire/Jack Mode - indicator lamps 3 and 6 will be
between 15 mph (24 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h),
illuminated. Customer driving will disable Tire/Jack
indicator lamp 4 will remain on solid and indicator
Mode.
lamp 3 will flash as the system waits for the vehicle to
reduce speed. If vehicle speed is reduced to, and kept • Wheel Alignment Mode - indicator lamps 3 and 4 will
be illuminated. Customer driving will disable Wheel
below, 15 mph (24 km/h) indicator lamp 4 will turn off
Alignment Mode.
and indicator lamp 3 will flash until Entry/Exit Mode
is achieved at which point indicator lamp 3 will go
solid. If during the height change to Entry/Exit Mode,
the vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h), the
STARTING AND OPERATING 499
fascia is attached to the lower part of the front fascia with
seven quarter turn fasteners and can be removed by
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a narrower
hand. The front license plate bracket must be removed
track to make them capable of performing in a wide variety
first if equipped.
of off-road applications. Specific design characteristics give
them a higher center of gravity than ordinary vehicles.
ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better
view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems.
They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as
conventional two-wheel drive vehicles any more than
low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp
turns or abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this
type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in
loss of control or vehicle rollover.
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
5
Front Air Dam
NOTE: Prior to off-road driving with non-Summit mod- 1 — Front Bumper
els that are also equipped with an Off Road Package, 2 — Front Air Dam Fasteners
remove the lower fascia to prevent damage. The lower
500 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: On Summit models the lower front fascia is not NOTE: It is recommend to also remove the radar sensor
removable.
on vehicle equipped to Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC).
This radar sensor is specifically calibrated to your vehicle
Lower Front Fascia Removal:
and is not interchangeable with other radar sensors.
1. Remove the seven quarter turn fasteners.
Radar Sensor Removal Procedure (If Equipped With
2. Starting on one side of the vehicle, disengage lower Adaptive Cruise Control [ACC]):
fascia from the upper fascia. Grasp the portion inside
1. With the lower fascia removed, which provides access
the wheel well. Pulling it downwards and toward you,
to the sensor and bracket, disconnect the wiring
separate the tabs from the slots in the upper fascia.
harness from the sensor.
3. Continue working your way across the vehicle, sepa2. Using a suitable tool, disconnect the wire clip from the
rating the remaining tabs from the slots in the upper
bracket.
fascia.
3. Using a suitable tool, remove the two fasteners that
NOTE: Do not allow the lower fascia to freely hang from
hold the sensor bracket to the bumper beam.
the tabs in the opposite corner as damage to lower and
upper fascia may result.
NOTE: It is recommended to scribe location to assist in
reinstallation.
4. Store the lower fascia in a safe location.
STARTING AND OPERATING 501
4. Locate the protective connector on the rear of the NOTE: Only models with the Off Road Package are
bumper beam.
equipped with the a protective connector.
5. Remove the plug from the protective connector and
install on the sensor.
6. Insert the wiring harness connector into the protective
connector.
7. Store sensor and bracket in a safe place.
NOTE: All cruise control functions will be disabled when
the radar sensor is disconnected.
Radar Sensor Installation Procedure (If Equipped With
Adaptive Cruise Control [ACC]):
Bumper Beam
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Inside Bumper Beam
Protective Connector Location
Sensor Bracket Fasteners
Sensor Bracket
1. Disconnect the wiring harness connector from the
protective connector on the bumper beam.
2. Remove plug from radar sensor and install in protective connector.
5
502 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. Using the previously scribed marks, reinstall the radar 3. Return to the center of the vehicle and repeat Step 2 to
sensor and bracket using the two fasteners.
the opposite side of the vehicle.
NOTE: Some alignment may be required upon fascia NOTE:
installation to align sensor with fascia.
• It may be necessary to apply additional force to
individual tabs to make sure they are fully engaged.
4. Install the wiring harness connector into the radar
sensor.
• Do not use any tools to apply additional force to the
tabs as damage to the upper and lower fascias may
NOTE: If you receive a fault, see your authorized dealer
result.
they may need to perform a sensor alignment.
4. Reinstall the seven quarter turn fasteners.
Lower Front Fascia Installation
NOTE: This will only work if you have a helper.
Quadra-Lift — If Equipped
1. Starting at the center of the vehicle, engage a sufficient When off-roading, it is recommended that the lowest
number of tabs to support the weight of the lower useable vehicle height that will clear the current obstacle
fascia (typically one or two tabs) into the upper fascia. or terrain be selected. The vehicle height should then be
raised as required by the changes in terrain.
2. Working your way outward, engage the tabs into the
slots on one side of the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 503
The Selec-Terrain switch will automatically change the
vehicle to the optimized height based on the SelecTerrain switch position. The vehicle height can be
changed from the default height for each Selec-Terrain
mode by normal use of the air suspension switches. Refer
to “Quadra-Lift – If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
When To Use 4WD LOW Range — If Equipped
When off-road driving, shift to 4WD LOW for additional
traction. This range should be limited to extreme situations such as deep snow, mud, or sand where additional
low speed pulling power is needed. Vehicle speeds in
excess of 25 mph (40 km/h) should be avoided when in
4WD LOW range.
WARNING!
Do not drive in 4WD-LOW Range on dry pavement;
driveline damage may result. 4WD-LOW Range
locks front and rear drivelines together and does not
allow for differential action between the front to rear
driveshafts. Driving in 4WD-LOW on pavement will
cause driveline binding; use only on wet or slippery
surfaces.
Driving Through Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
water, there are a number of precautions that must be
considered before entering the water.
5
504 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Your vehicle is capable of water fording in up to
20 inches (51 cm) of water, while crossing small rivers or
streams. To maintain optimal performance of your vehicle’s heating and ventilation system it is recommended to
switch the system into recirculation mode during water
fording.
CAUTION!
When driving through water, do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h). Always check water depth before entering,
as a precaution, and check all fluids afterward. Driving through water may cause damage that may not be
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
bottom condition (and location of any obstacles) prior to
entering. Proceed with caution and maintain a steady
controlled speed less than 5 mph (8 km/h) in deep water
to minimize wave effects.
Flowing Water
If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm
run-off), avoid crossing until the water level recedes
and/or the flow rate is reduced. If you must cross
flowing water avoid depths in excess of 9 inches (23 cm).
The flowing water can erode the streambed, causing your
vehicle to sink into deeper water. Determine exit point(s)
that are downstream of your entry point to allow for
drifting.
Standing Water
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. If you must
drive through water, try to determine the depth and the
Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 20 inches
(51 cm), and reduce speed appropriately to minimize
wave effects. Maximum speed in 20 inches (51 cm) of
water is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
STARTING AND OPERATING 505
Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads, because engine braking may cause skidding and loss of
After driving through deep water, inspect your vehicle
control.
fluids and lubricants (engine oil, transmission oil, axle,
transfer case) to assure the fluids have not been contami- Hill Climbing
nated. Contaminated fluid (milky, foamy in appearance)
NOTE: Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the
should be flushed/changed as soon as possible to preconditions at the crest and/or on the other side.
vent component damage.
Before climbing a steep hill, shift the transmission to a
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
lower gear and shift the transfer case to 4WD LOW. Use
In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for additional first gear and 4WD LOW for very steep hills.
control at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a low
If you stall or begin to lose forward motion while
gear and shift the transfer case to 4WD LOW if necessary.
climbing a steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop
Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation” in “Starting and
and immediately apply the brakes. Restart the engine,
Operating” for further information. Do not shift to a
and shift into REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill,
lower gear than necessary to maintain forward motion.
allowing the compression braking of the engine to help
Over-revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction
regulate your speed. If the brakes are required to control
will be lost.
vehicle speed, apply them lightly and avoid locking or
skidding the tires.
Maintenance
5
506 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
If the engine stalls, you lose forward motion, or
cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade,
never attempt to turn around. To do so may result in
tipping and rolling the vehicle. Always back carefully straight down a hill in REVERSE gear. Never
back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the brake.
Traction Downhill
When descending mountains or hills, use Hill Descent or
Selec-Speed Control to avoid repeated heavy braking.
If not equipped with Hill Descent or Selec-Speed Control
use the following procedure:
Shift the transmission into a low gear, and the transfer
case into 4WD LOW range. Let the vehicle go slowly
down the hill with all four wheels turning against engine
Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill always
compression drag. This will permit you to control the
drive straight up or down.
vehicle speed and direction.
If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a
When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking
hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain forward motion
can cause brake fade with loss of braking control. Avoid
by turning the front wheels slowly. This may provide a
repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmisfresh “bite” into the surface and will usually provide
sion whenever possible.
traction to complete the climb.
STARTING AND OPERATING 507
• After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected
does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is
and cleaned as soon as possible.
always a good idea to check for damage. That way you
can get any problems taken care of right away and have
WARNING!
your vehicle ready when you need it.
• Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle. Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might
exhaust system for damage.
not have full braking power when you need it to
• Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as prevent a collision. If you have been operating your
vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked
required.
and cleaned as necessary.
• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on
the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and sus- • If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
pension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for
values specified in the Service Manual.
impacted material. Impacted material can cause a
wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will
• Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These things
correct the situation.
could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage to fuel
After Driving Off-Road
lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and propeller shafts.
5
508 STARTING AND OPERATING
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide
light efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If
the electric steering system experiences a fault that
prevents it from providing assist, you will still have the
ability to steer the vehicle manually.
If the Electric Power Steering warning icon is
displayed and the “SERVICE POWER STEERING” or the “POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF –
SERVICE SYSTEM” message is displayed within
the Driver Information Display (DID), this indicates the
vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for service. Refer to
“Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Alternate electric power steering efforts can be selected NOTE:
through the Uconnect System. Refer to ”Customer Program- • Even if the power steering assistance is no longer
mable Features” within “Uconnect Settings” in “Underoperational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle.
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Under these conditions there will be a substantial
increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds and
WARNING!
during parking maneuvers.
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
service.
obtained as soon as possible.
STARTING AND OPERATING 509
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ENGINE ONLY
— IF EQUIPPED
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting
off four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load
and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no
driver inputs or additional driving skills required.
release the parking brake, press the park brake pedal a
second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake
disengage.
NOTE: This system may take some time to return to full
functionality after a battery disconnect.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the gear selector in the
PARK position.
The foot operated parking brake is located below the
Parking Brake
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To
switch in the ON position, the “Brake” Warning Light in
the instrument cluster will illuminate.
5
510 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake” Warning Light will
flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound
to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake
before attempting to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking
brake before placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK.
The parking brake should always be applied whenever
the driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 511
WARNING! (Continued)
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in the “OFF” mode, remove
the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.
A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the “Brake” Warning Light remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake
systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses
normal capability, the remaining system will still function. However, there will be some loss of overall braking
effectiveness. You may notice increased pedal travel
during application, greater pedal force required to slow
or stop, and potential activation of the “Brake System
Warning Light.”
5
512 STARTING AND OPERATING
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine off) the
brakes will still function. However, the effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
Brake Control system (EBC). This system includes Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start Assist
(HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic Stability
Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM). These
systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability
and control in various driving conditions.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
This function manages the distribution of the braking
torque between the front and rear axles by limiting
braking pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent
overslip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability,
and to prevent the rear axle from entering ABS before the
front axle.
Brake System Warning Light
The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn on when
the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the brake system
is not functioning properly and that immediate service is
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Trailer Sway required. If the “Brake System Warning Light” does not
Control (TSC), Ready Alert Braking (RAB), Rain Brake come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
Support (RBS), Dynamic Steering Torque (DST), Hill position, have the light repaired as soon as possible.
Descent Control (HDC), and Selec-Speed Control (SSC).
STARTING AND OPERATING 513
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
• Brake pedal pulsations.
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased • A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop.
vehicle stability and brake performance under most
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
braking conditions. The system automatically prevents
WARNING!
wheel lock, and enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the
ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started
and driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.
ABS is activated during braking when the system detects
one or more wheels begins to lock. Road conditions such as
ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or
panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following when ABS activates:
• The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop).
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference
caused by improperly installed or high output
radio transmitting equipment. This interference
can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of such equipment should be
performed by qualified professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.
(Continued)
5
514 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or
the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The amber “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if the “Brake
System Warning Light” is not on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake
system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore
the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake
ABS is designed to function with the OEM tires. Modifi- Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position, have the light
cation may result in degraded ABS performance.
repaired as soon as possible.
STARTING AND OPERATING 515
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence, (do not
“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
5
516 STARTING AND OPERATING
• The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle
The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll back from a
backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases
the brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue • HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward
to hold the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver
gears. The system will not activate if the transmission
does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the
is in PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with
system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will
a manual transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA
roll down the hill as normal.
will remain active.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• The feature must be enabled.
• The vehicle must be stopped.
• Park brake must be off.
• Driver door must be closed.
• The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,
such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or
while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to other
vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 517
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain
safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision or serious personal
injury.
not be enough brake pressure to hold both the
vehicle and the trailer on a hill when the brake
pedal is released. In order to avoid rolling down an
incline while resuming acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle brake
pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal.
• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle.
Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
• Failure to follow these warnings may cause the
vehicle to roll down the incline and could collide
with another vehicle, object or person, and cause
serious or fatal injury. Always remember to use the
parking brake while parking on a hill and that the
driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back
while towing a trailer.
WARNING!
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there may
(Continued)
5
518 STARTING AND OPERATING
Disabling And Enabling HSA
4. Start the engine.
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the 5. Rotate the steering wheel slightly more than one-half
current setting, proceed as follows:
turn to the left.
• For vehicles equipped with the Driver Information 6. Push the “ESC Off” button located in the lower switch
Display (DID), refer to “Driver Information Display
bank below the climate control four times within
(DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
twenty seconds. The “ESC Off Indicator Light” should
further information.
turn on and turn off two times.
• If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, refer to 7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instruadditional slighty more than one-half turn to the right.
ment Panel” for further information.
8. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then
For vehicles not equipped with the DID, perform the
back to the ON position. If the sequence was comfollowing steps:
pleted properly, the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will
blink several times to confirm HSA is disabled.
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing
straight forward).
9. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Apply the parking brake.
STARTING AND OPERATING 519
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
maintain the desired path.
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may
apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
reduce engine power to provide enhanced acceleration path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
and stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differ- path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
ential (BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differen- the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the approtial and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If priate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the understeer condition.
other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD may remain
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
enabled even if TCS and ESC are in a reduced mode.
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” loThis system enhances directional control and stability of
cated in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC coras the ESC system becomes active. The “ESC Activation/
rects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when the TCS
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in
is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Traction Control System (TCS)
5
520 STARTING AND OPERATING
Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure
to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
WARNING!
• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a
safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly maintain your vehicle, may change the handling characteristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect
the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the
steering system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely affect
ESC performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle modification or poor vehicle
maintenance that reduces the effectiveness of the
ESC system can increase the risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
STARTING AND OPERATING 521
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the
“ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will
NOTE: Depending upon model and mode of operation,
illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push
the ESC system may have multiple operating modes.
the “ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light”
ESC On
will turn off.
ESC Operating Modes
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this
mode. This mode should be used for most driving
conditions. Alternate ESC modes should only be used for
specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
NOTE: For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes a
momentary button push will toggle the ESC mode.
Multiple momentary button pushed may be required to
return to ESC On.
Partial Off
• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of
ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in
the TCS section), has been disabled and the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial
Off” mode, the engine power reduction feature of TCS
is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered
by the ESC system is reduced.
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a
more spirited driving experience is desired. This mode
may modify TCS and ESC thresholds for activation,
which allows for more wheel spin than normally allowed. This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes
stuck.
NOTE:
5
522 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC ESC modes may also be affected by drive modes – if
equipped.
system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
Full Off – If Equipped
WARNING!
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use
only and should not be used on any public roadways. In • In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque
reduction and stability features are disabled.
this mode, TCS and ESC features are turned OFF. To enter
Therefore, enhanced vehicle stability offered by
the “Full Off” mode, push and hold the “ESC Off” switch
the ESC system is unavailable. In an emergency
for five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the
evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not engage
engine running. After five seconds, a chime will sound,
to assist in maintaining stability. “ESC Off” mode
the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will illuminate, and the
is intended for off-highway or off-road use only.
“ESC OFF” message will display in the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC). To turn ESC ON again,
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and
momentarily push the “ESC Off” switch.
ESC OFF Indicator Light
NOTE: System may switch from ESC Full Off to Partial
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
mode when vehicle exceeds a predetermined speed.
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
When the vehicle speed slows below the predetermined
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
speed the system will return to ESC Full Off.
position. It should go out with the engine
STARTING AND OPERATING 523
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator NOTE:
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momenlight remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your autho- • Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lowhen ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
that caused the ESC activation.
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during accustomer has elected to have the Electronic
celeration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
Stability Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
5
524 STARTING AND OPERATING
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
WARNING!
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road condispeed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate tions and driving conditions, influence the chance
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then prevent all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those
applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects
engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERMoccur. ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckoccurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers; it less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as user’s safety or the safety of others.
road conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
or other vehicles.
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively
NOTE: ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full Off” swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to
mode (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic Stability Control attempt to stop the sway. TSC will become active automati(ESC)” in this section for a complete explanation of the cally once an excessively swaying trailer is recognized.
available ESC modes.
Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying.
Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the
STARTING AND OPERATING 525
trailer tongue weight recommendations. Refer to “Trailer occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by
the driver. The EBC will prepare the brake system for a
Towing” in this section for further information.
panic stop.
When TSC is functioning, the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, the engine power Rain Brake Support (RBS)
may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being
Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance
applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer
in wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small
from swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in
amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup
the “Partial Off” or “Full Off” modes.
on the front brake rotors. It functions when the windshield wipers are in LO or HI speed. When Rain Brake
WARNING!
Support is active, there is no notification to the driver and
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle no driver interaction is required.
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
Dynamic Steering Torque is a feature of the ESC and EPS
modules that provides torque at the steering wheel for
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
certain driving conditions in which the ESC module is
Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to
detecting vehicle instability. The torque that the steering
reach full braking during emergency braking situations.
wheel receives is only meant to help the driver realize
It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may
optimal steering behavior in order to reach/maintain
5
526 STARTING AND OPERATING
vehicle stability. The only notification the driver receives 2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation
conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding
that the feature is active is the torque applied to the
with brake or throttle application).
steering wheel.
NOTE: The DST feature is only meant to help the driver
realize the correct course of action through small torques on
the steering wheel, which means the effectiveness of the DST
feature is highly dependent on the drivers sensitivity and
overall reaction to the applied torque. It is very important to
realize that this feature will not steer the vehicle, meaning
the driver is still responsible for steering the vehicle.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling
vehicle speed).
Enabling HDC
HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but the
following conditions must also be met to enable HDC:
• Driveline is in 4WD Low Range
• Vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
HDC is intended for low speed off road driving while in • Parking brake is released.
4WD Low Range. HDC maintains vehicle speed while
descending hills during various driving situations. HDC • Driver door is closed.
controls vehicle speed by actively controlling the brakes.
HDC has three states:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate).
STARTING AND OPERATING 527
Activating HDC
• 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
Once HDC is enabled, it will activate automatically if • 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
driven down a grade of sufficient magnitude. The set
speed for HDC is selectable by the driver, and can be • 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
adjusted by using the gear shift +/-. The following • 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
summarizes the HDC set speeds:
• 8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)
HDC Target Set Speeds
• 9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped
• P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but will not
NOTE: During HDC, the +/- shifter input is used for
activate
HDC target speed selection but will not affect the gear
• R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
chosen by the transmission. When actively controlling
HDC, the transmission will shift appropriately for the
• N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
driver-selected set speed and corresponding driving con• D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
ditions.
• 1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
Driver Override
• 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
The driver may override HDC activation with throttle or
brake application at anytime.
• 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
5
528 STARTING AND OPERATING
Deactivating HDC
• The parking brake is applied.
HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any of • Driver door opens.
the following conditions occur:
• The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph (32 km/h)
• Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle or brake
for greater than 70 seconds.
application.
• The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph (64 km/h)
• Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but remains
(HDC exits immediately).
below 40 mph (64 km/h).
• HDC detects excessive brake temperature.
• Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient magniFeedback To The Driver
tude, is on level ground, or is on an uphill grade.
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the HDC
• Vehicle is shifted to park.
switch has an LED which offer feedback to the driver
Disabling HDC
about the state HDC is in.
HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of the • The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and
following conditions occur:
remain on solid when HDC is enabled or activated.
This is the normal operating condition for HDC.
• The driver pushes the HDC switch.
• The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low Range.
STARTING AND OPERATING 529
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several Selec Speed Control (SSC) — If Equipped
seconds then extinguish when the driver pushes the SSC is intended for off road driving in 4WD Low Range
HDC switch but enable conditions are not met.
only. SSC maintains vehicle speed by actively controlling
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several engine torque and brakes.
seconds then extinguish when HDC disables due to SSC has three states:
excess speed.
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate).
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash when HDC
deactivates due to overheated brakes. The flashing will 2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation
conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding
stop and HDC will activate again once the brakes have
with brake or throttle application).
cooled sufficiently.
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling vehicle speed when descending hills. The driver
must remain attentive to the driving conditions and
is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling
vehicle speed).
Enabling SSC
SSC is enabled by pushing the SSC switch, but the
following conditions must also be met to enable SSC:
• Driveline is in 4WD Low Range.
5
530 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h)
• Parking brake is released.
• Driver door is closed.
• Driver is not applying throttle.
Activating SSC
and the level of set speed reduction depends on the
magnitude of grade. The following summarizes the SSC
set speeds:
SSC Target Set Speeds
• 1st = .6 mph (1 km/h)
•
Once SSC is enabled it will activate automatically once
•
the following conditions are met:
•
• Driver releases throttle.
•
• Driver releases brake.
•
• Transmission is in any selection other than P.
• Vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h)
2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
• 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
The set speed for SSC is selectable by the driver, and can • 8th = 5 mph (8 km/h)
be adjusted by using the gear shift +/-. Additionally, the • 9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped
SSC set speed may be reduced when climbing a grade
• REVERSE = .6 mph (1 km/h)
STARTING AND OPERATING 531
• NEUTRAL = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
Driver Override:
• PARK = SSC remains enabled but not active
The driver may override SSC activation with throttle or
brake application at any time.
NOTE:
Deactivating SSC
• During SSC the +/- shifter input is used for SSC target
speed selection but will not affect the gear chosen by SSC will be deactivated but remain available if any of the
the transmission. While actively controlling SSC the following conditions occur:
transmission will shift appropriately for the driver- • Driver overrides SSC set speed with throttle or brake
selected set speed and corresponding driving condiapplication.
tions.
• Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but remains
• SSC performance is influenced by the Terrain Select
below 40 mph (64 km/h).
mode. This difference may be notable to the driver and
may be perceived as a varying level of aggressiveness. • Vehicle is shifted to PARK.
5
532 STARTING AND OPERATING
Disabling SSC
Feedback To The Driver:
SSC will deactivate and be disabled if any of the follow- The instrument cluster has an SSC icon and the SSC
ing conditions occur:
switch has an LED which offer feedback to the driver
about the state SSC is in.
• The driver pushes the SSC switch.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and
• The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low Range.
remain on solid when SSC is enabled or activated. This
• The parking brake is applied.
is the normal operating condition for SSC.
• Driver door opens.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when the driver pushes the
• The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph (32 km/h)
SSC switch but enable conditions are not met.
for greater than 70 seconds.
• The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph (64 km/h)
(SSC exits immediately).
STARTING AND OPERATING 533
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
seconds then extinguish when SSC disables due to
Tire Markings
excess speed.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash then
extinguish when SSC deactivates due to overheated
brakes.
5
WARNING!
SSC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling vehicle speed when driving in off road conditions. The driver must remain attentive to the driving
conditions and is responsible for maintaining a safe
vehicle speed.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
534 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure com• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designaT145/80D18 103M.
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
NOTE:
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
STARTING AND OPERATING 535
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
– ⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or
– ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
5
536 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
STARTING AND OPERATING 537
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
5
538 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
STARTING AND OPERATING 539
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three
hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
5
540 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
STARTING AND OPERATING 541
Tire And Loading Information Placard
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting
And Operating” section of this manual.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” section of this manual.
5
542 STARTING AND OPERATING
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
“XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five
150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of
capacity calculated in Step 4.
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Con(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and
sult this manual to determine how this reduces the
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
available cargo and luggage load capacity of your
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and vehicle.
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
STARTING AND OPERATING 543
• For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there
(392 kg).
will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount
of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg
(635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
Metric Example For Load Limit
NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following table shows examples on how to calculate total
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration
purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating
and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
5
544 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING AND OPERATING 545
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
5
546 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the
need for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
Tire Inflation Pressures
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
NOTE:
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door.
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
At least once a month:
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the • Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
vehicle to drift left or right.
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires
Fuel Economy
may look properly inflated even when they are underUnderinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
inflated.
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
STARTING AND OPERATING 547
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1
mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours.
The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
5
548 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
Radial Ply Tires
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
WARNING!
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Alloading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera- ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
tion. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original combine them with other types of tires.
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operatTire Repair
ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm).
STARTING AND OPERATING 549
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
additional information.
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme- on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be
diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if
Tire Types
roads are covered with ice or snow. For more informaAll Season Tires — If Equipped
tion, contact an authorized dealer.
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Fall and Winter). Traction levels may vary
between different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
5
550 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury
or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates
the possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h), refer
to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
Snow Tires
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
If you need snow tires, select tires checked before using these tire types.
equivalent in size and type to the
original equipment tires. Use snow
tires only in sets of four; failure to do
so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
STARTING AND OPERATING 551
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
mode.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited-use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more infor- Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
mation.
Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
instead of a spare tire, please refer to the “Tire Service
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
Kit” section located in your Owner’s Information kit for
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,
further information.
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
tire rotation pattern.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
5
552 STARTING AND OPERATING
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire. front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
STARTING AND OPERATING 553
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.
5
554 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Spinning
Tread Wear Indicators
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or to help you in determining when your tires should be
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop- replaced.
ping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tire Tread
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
STARTING AND OPERATING 555
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread • Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle mainbecomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
tenance schedule is highly recommended.
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
WARNING!
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
• Distance driven.
5
556 STARTING AND OPERATING
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
those of the original wheels.
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manu- It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva- dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
“Tread Wear Indicator”. Refer to the Tire and Loading the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
WARNING!
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart ex- • Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
ample found in the “Tire Safety Information” section of
of unapproved tires and wheels may change susthis manual for more information relating to the Load
pension dimensions and performance characterisIndex and Speed Symbol of a tire.
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
(Continued)
Replacement Tires
STARTING AND OPERATING 557
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard
against damage.
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
• Install on Rear Tires Only
• Due to limited clearance, Thule XG-12 Pro or equivalent is recommended on P245/70/R17, P265/60R18 or
265/50R20 tires.
5
558 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
CAUTION! (Continued)
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove
the damaged parts of the device before further use.
(Continued)
• Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating
speed, and conditions for use. Always use the
suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
STARTING AND OPERATING 559
NOTE: The premium Tire Pressure Monitor System will
automatically locate the pressure values displayed in the
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
correct vehicle position following a tire rotation.
different loads and perform different steering, handling,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at The suggested rotation method is the “rearward-cross”
unequal rates.
shown in the following diagram.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off-Road
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to
a smooth, quiet ride.
5
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. More frequent rotation is permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
Tire Rotation
560 STARTING AND OPERATING
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn
threshold for any reason, including low temperature
the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle
effects, or natural pressure loss through the tire.
recommended cold tire placard pressure.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when
off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
cold tire placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
warning has been illuminated, the tire pressure must be
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
increased to the recommended cold tire pressure in order
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to be
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
turned off. The system will automatically update and the
three-hour period. Refer to “Tires – General InformaTire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish
tion” in “Starting and Operating” for information on
once the updated tire pressures have been received. The
how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is
15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.
normal and there should be no adjustment for this
increased pressure.
For example, your vehicle has a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) tire placard pressure
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
STARTING AND OPERATING 561
of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle
may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28
psi (193 kPa), but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will still be ON. In this situation, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the
tires have been inflated to the vehicle’s recommended
cold tire pressure value.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warnings have been established for the tire size
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have
your sensor function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor.
5
562 STARTING AND OPERATING
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
failure or condition.
illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
Light.
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
NOTE:
STARTING AND OPERATING 563
NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to regularly
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless check the tire pressure in all of your tires and to maintain
technology with wheel rim-mounted electronic sensors to the proper pressure.
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) consists of the
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure following components:
readings to the Receiver Module.
• Receiver Module
Premium System
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages,
which display in the Driver Information Display
(DID), and a graphic displaying tire pressures
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitor Display
5
564 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime will be activated, when one or more of the
four active road tire pressures are low. In addition, the
DID will display a ⬙Tire Low⬙ message, an ⬙Inflate to
XXX⬙ message and a graphic display of the pressure
value(s) with the low tire(s) displayed in a different color.
Refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE: Your system can be set to display pressure units
Low Tire Pressure Monitor Display
in PSI, BAR or kPa.
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four
active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible,
and inflate the low tire(s) that is in a different color on the
graphic display to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire
pressure displayed in the ⬙Inflate to XXX⬙ message.
STARTING AND OPERATING 565
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in order
to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
The system will automatically update, the graphic display
of the pressure value(s) will return to its original color and
the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish
once the updated tire pressure(s) have been received. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.
Service TPM System Warning
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will no longer flash, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
message will not be present, and a pressure value will be
displayed instead of dashes. A system fault can occur by
any of the following:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the
TPM sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
that affects radio wave signals.
and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a
system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound 3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
a chime. The DID will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for a minimum of five seconds. This 4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
message is then followed by a graphic display, with “- -“
in place of the pressure value(s), indicating which Tire 5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s) is not being received.
5
566 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: There is no tire pressure monitoring sensor in the
spare tire. The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire
pressure. If you install the spare tire in place of a road tire
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,
upon the next ignition switch cycle, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will remain ON, a chime will
sound, and the DID will still display a pressure value in
the different color graphic display and an ⬙Inflate to XXX
kPa⬙ message will be displayed. After driving the vehicle
for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In addition, the
DID will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for
five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value. For each subsequent ignition switch
cycle, a chime will sound, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid, and the DID will display a ⬙SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value. Once you
repair or replace the original road tire, and reinstall it on
the vehicle in place of the spare tire, the TPMS will
update automatically.
In addition, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
will turn OFF and the graphic in the DID will display a
new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no
tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in
any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to
be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
STARTING AND OPERATING 567
2. This device must accept any interference received, (R+M)/2 method. The use of higher octane “Premium”
including interference that may cause undesired op- gasoline will not provide any benefit over “Regular”
gasoline in these engines.
eration.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved While operating on gasoline with an octane number of
by the party responsible for compliance could void the 87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not
a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immeFUEL REQUIREMENTS
diately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower
than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be
3.6L Engine — If Equipped
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
This engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance
when using high-quality unleaded
“Regular” gasoline having an octane
rating of 87 as specified by the
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
5
568 STARTING AND OPERATING
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considThis engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide sat- ering service for the vehicle.
isfactory fuel economy and perfor- Reformulated Gasoline
mance when using high-quality unMany areas of the country require the use of cleaner
leaded gasoline having an octane
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
range of 87 to 89 as specified by the
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe(R+M)/2 method. The use of 89 octane
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im“Plus” gasoline is recommended for optimum perforprove air quality.
mance and fuel economy.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. PropWhile operating on gasoline with an octane number of
erly blended reformulated gasoline will provide im87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not
proved performance and durability of engine and fuel
a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard
system components.
making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower
than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
5.7L Engine — If Equipped
STARTING AND OPERATING 569
Modifications that allow the engine to run on comSome fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy- pressed natural gas (CNG) or liquid propane (LP) may
result in damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel
genates such as ethanol.
system components. Problems that result from running
CNG or LP are not the responsibility of the manufacturer
CAUTION!
and many void or not be covered under the New Vehicle
DO NOT use gasoline containing methanol or gaso- Limited Warranty.
line containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
these blends may result in starting and drivability
problems, damage critical fuel system components, Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasocause emissions to exceed the applicable standard, line containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Gasoline with
and/or cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limilluminate. Please observe pump labels as they ited Warranty.
should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
than 15% ethanol (E-15).
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more • Operate in a lean mode.
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol are
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Poor engine performance.
5
570 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
Materials Added To Fuel
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and
MMT In Gasoline
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) have these additives will help improve fuel economy,
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoblended with MMT provides no performance advantage
line contains a higher level of deterbeyond gasoline of the same octane number without
gents to further aide in minimizing
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
engine and fuel system deposits.
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
When available, the usage of Top Tier
Detergent gasoline is recommended.
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump, TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum
and California reformulated gasoline.
and varnish removal may contain active solvents or
similar ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket
and diaphragm materials.
STARTING AND OPERATING 571
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
(Continued)
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer and may void or not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
5
572 STARTING AND OPERATING
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
(Continued)
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
STARTING AND OPERATING 573
ADDING FUEL
1. Push the fuel filler door release switch (located under
the headlamp switch).
5
Fuel Filler Door
Fuel Filler Door Release Switch
2. Open the fuel filler door.
NOTE: In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the
fuel door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the
fuel door to break the ice buildup and re-release the fuel
door using the inside release button. Do not pry on the
door.
574 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door inside the • Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper door
open.
pipe seals the system.
4. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe, the nozzle • Pour fuel into funnel opening.
opens and holds the flapper door while refueling.
• Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior to
putting back in the spare tire storage area.
5. Fill the vehicle with fuel, when the fuel nozzle “clicks”
or shuts off the fuel tank is full.
6. Wait 5 seconds before removing the fuel nozzle to
allow fuel to drain from nozzle.
7. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door.
Emergency Gas Can Refueling
• Most gas cans will not open the flapper door.
• A funnel is provided to open the flapper door to allow
emergency refueling with a gas can.
• Retrieve funnel from the spare tire storage area.
• Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening as the fuel
nozzle.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 575
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the “Malfunction Indicator
Light” to turn on.
• A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the
ground while filling.
4. Remove the storage bin.
5. Pull the release cable to open the fuel door, push the
release cable back to the home position to re-seat the
fuel door latch to the closed position.
5
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use the fuel
filler door emergency release.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Push the inboard edge of the left storage bin to the
center, this will pop up the outboard edge.
3. Grab popped up outboard edge with other hand to
disengage snaps.
Release Cable
576 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: If the fuel door does not latch after the manual Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
release cable has been activated, the actuator latch should The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
be manually returned to the closed position.
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
VEHICLE LOADING
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
Certification Label
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin- Payload
istration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the
This label contains the month and year of manufacture, driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
bottom of the label is your VIN.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
STARTING AND OPERATING 577
components sometimes specified by purchasers for in- capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehi- loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
cle’s GVWR.
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
Tire Size
added.
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined
Rim Size
by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commerlisted.
cial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded.
Inflation Pressure
The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for then be determined separately to be sure that the load is
properly distributed over the front and rear axle. Weighall loading conditions up to full GAWR.
ing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the
Curb Weight
front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the
5
578 STARTING AND OPERATING
specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier TRAILER TOWING
items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed In this section you will find safety tips and information
equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
the brakes operate.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
lose control. Also overloading can shorten the life of
your vehicle.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
follow the requirements and recommendations in this
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
STARTING AND OPERATING 579
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
Certification Label” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
WARNING!
If the gross trailer weight is 5,000 lbs (2 267 kg) or
more, it is recommended to use a weight-distributing
hitch to ensure stable handling of your vehicle. If
you use a standard weight-carrying hitch, you could
lose control of your vehicle and cause a collision.
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
ready for operation⬙ condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight and trailer when weighed in combination.
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
5
580 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Frontal Area
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of
the load on your vehicle.
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control can be a mechanical telescoping
link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and
the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen
any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
If equipped, the electronic Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies
individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to
attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
STARTING AND OPERATING 581
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
and trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
WARNING!
trailers.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used
in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
• An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in a collision.
• Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your
hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information.
5
582 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2 267 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty
10,000 lbs (4 535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer
Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 583
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer
weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain:
Engine
3.6L (Std Cooling)
3.6L (Std Cooling)
3.6L (HD Cooling)
3.6L (HD Cooling)
5.7L (Std Cooling)
5.7L (HD Cooling)
Model
4x2
4x4
4x2
4x4
4x4
4x4
Refer to
Max. GTW (Gross
Trailer Wt.)
55 sq ft (5.11 sq m)
3,500 lbs (1587 kgs)
55 sq ft (5.11 sq m)
3,500 lbs (1587 kgs)
55 sq ft (5.11 sq m)
6,200 lbs (2812 kg)
55 sq ft (5.11 sq m)
6,200 lbs (2812 kg)
55 sq ft (5.11 sq m)
5,000 lbs (2267kgs)
55 sq ft (5.11 sq m)
7,200 lbs (3265 kg)
local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
Frontal Area
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as
part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire
and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tire Safety
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for further
Max. Trailer Tongue
Wt. (See Note)
350 lbs (158 kgs)
350 lbs (158 kgs)
620 lbs (281 kg)
620 lbs (281 kg)
500 lbs (226 kgs)
720 lbs (326 kg)
information. The addition of passengers and cargo may
require reducing trailer tongue load and Gross Trailer
Weight (GTW). Redistributing cargo (to the trailer) may
be necessary to avoid exceeding Rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) of 3,700 lbs (1 678 kg).
5
584 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover Removal (Summit
Models) — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a trailer hitch receiver cover, this must be removed to access the trailer
hitch receiver (if equipped). This hitch receiver cover is
located at the bottom center of the rear fascia.
1. Turn the two locking retainers located at the bottom of
the hitch receiver cover a 1/4 turn counterclockwise.
NOTE: Use a suitable tool such as a coin in the slot of the
locking retainer if needed for added leverage.
Hitch Receiver Cover
1 — Hitch Receiver Cover
2 — Locking Retainers
STARTING AND OPERATING 585
2. Pull the bottom of the cover outward (towards you), Trailer And Tongue Weight
pull downwards to disengage the tabs located at the
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
top of the hitch receiver cover.
your trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle
• The weight of the driver and all passengers
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
Hitch Receiver Cover
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
To reinstall the hitch receiver cover after towing repeat Refer to “Tire Safety Information/Tire and Loading Inthe procedure in reverse order.
formation Placard” in “Starting And Operating” for
NOTE: Be sure to engage all tabs of the hitch receiver further information.
cover in the bumper fascia prior to installation.
5
586 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain
components, the following guidelines are recommended.
CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Maintenance
Schedule”. Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the
proper maintenance intervals. When towing a trailer,
never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure or tires.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 587
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure
the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always,
block or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
(Continued)
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
Towing Requirements — Tires
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Operating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage.
5
588 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
Information” in “Starting And Operating” for the
WARNING!
proper inspection procedure.
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Inforhydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
mation” in “Starting And Operating” for the proper
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a
brakes when you need them and could have an
higher load carrying capacity will not increase the
accident.
vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in an
accident.
STARTING AND OPERATING 589
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
1,653 lbs (749 kg).
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer. The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and sevenThis could cause inadequate braking and possible pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector.
personal injury.
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
required when towing a trailer with electronically wiring harness.
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
5
590 STARTING AND OPERATING
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
Seven-Pin Connector
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Battery
Backup Lamps
Right Stop/Turn
Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
STARTING AND OPERATING 591
Towing Tips
Autostick
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping • When using the AutoStick shift control, select the
and backing the trailer up in an area away from heavy
highest gear that allows for adequate performance and
traffic.
avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose “5” if
the desired speed can be maintained. Choose “4” or
Automatic Transmission
“3” if needed to maintain the desired speed.
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid • To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as necesfrequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent
sary to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to
shifting does occur while in DRIVE, you can use the
a higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road
AutoStick shift control or manual gate of shifter to
conditions allow.
manually select a lower gear.
NOTE: Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped
under heavy loading conditions, will improve perfor- • Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
mance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup. This action will also • When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
provide better engine braking.
you can get back to cruising speed.
5
592 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to SNOW PLOW
maximize fuel efficiency.
Snow plows, winches, and other aftermarket equipment
should not be added to the front end of your vehicle. The
Cooling System
airbag crash sensors may be affected by the change in the
To reduce potential for engine and transmission overfront end structure. The airbags could deploy unexpectheating, take the following actions:
edly or could fail to deploy during a collision.
City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
WARNING!
Do not add a snow plow, winches, or any other
aftermarket equipment to the front of your vehicle.
This could adversely affect the functioning of the
airbag system and you could be injured.
STARTING AND OPERATING 593
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition
Wheels OFF the
Ground
Two-Wheel Drive
Models
Flat Tow
NONE
NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow
On Trailer
Front
Rear
ALL
NOT ALLOWED
OK
OK
Four-Wheel Drive
Models Without
4–LO Range
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
Four-Wheel Drive
Models With 4–LO
Range
See Instructions
• Transmission in
PARK
• Transfer case in
NEUTRAL (N)
• Tow in forward
direction
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
5
594 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
Recreational Towing – Two-Wheel Drive Models
• When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain
state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial will result.
Highway Safety offices for additional details.
Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive models) is
• Vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift must be placed in allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the ground.
Transport Mode before tying them down (from the This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle
body) on a trailer or flatbed truck. Refer to “Quadra- trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
Lift – If Equipped” in “Starting and Operating” for 1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
more information. If the vehicle cannot be placed in
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
Transport mode (for example, engine will not run),
tie-downs must be fastened to the axles (not to the NOTE: If vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift air susbody). Failure to follow these instructions may cause pension, ensure the vehicle is set to Normal Ride Height.
fault codes to be set and/or cause loss of proper 2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.
tie-down tension.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Shift the transmission
into PARK.
STARTING AND OPERATING 595
4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
Recreational Towing — Quadra-Trac I
(Single-Speed Transfer Case) Four-Wheel Drive
5. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly, following
Models
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
Recreational towing is not allowed. These models do
6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed for tow- not have a NEUTRAL (N) position in the transfer case.
ing, to secure the front wheels in the straight position.
NOTE: This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle
trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the ground.
CAUTION!
Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will
cause severe transmission damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or transfer
case damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
5
596 STARTING AND OPERATING
Recreational Towing — Quadra–Trac II
/Quadra–Drive II Four-Wheel Drive Models
The transfer case must be shifted into NEUTRAL (N) and
the transmission must be in PARK for recreational towing. The NEUTRAL (N) selection button is adjacent to the
transfer case selector switch. Shifts into and out of
transfer case NEUTRAL (N) can take place with the
selector switch in any mode position.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Towing with
only one set of wheels on the ground (front or rear)
will cause severe transmission and/or transfer case
damage. Tow with all four wheels either ON the
ground, or OFF the ground (using a vehicle trailer).
• Tow only in a forward direction. Towing this vehicle backwards can cause severe damage to the
transfer case.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• The transmission must be in PARK for recreational
towing.
• Before recreational towing, perform the procedure
outlined under “Shifting into NEUTRAL (N)” to be
certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL
(N). Otherwise, internal damage will result.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or
transfer case damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
• Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar
on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be
damaged.
STARTING AND OPERATING 597
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging
the parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N)
position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle
to roll, even if the transmission is in PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied when the
driver is not in the vehicle.
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing.
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N) before
recreational towing to prevent damage to internal
parts.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, with the engine
running.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
4. If vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift air suspension,
ensure the vehicle is set to Normal Ride Height.
5
598 STARTING AND OPERATING
5. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, press and hold
the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL (N) button (located by the selector switch) for four seconds. The
light behind the N symbol will blink, indicating shift
in progress. The light will stop blinking (stay on solid)
when the shift to NEUTRAL (N) is complete. A “FOUR
WHEEL DRIVE SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL” message will
appear in the Driver Information Display (DID). Refer
to “Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NEUTRAL (N) Switch
6. After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL (N)
light stays on, release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
8. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure
that there is no vehicle movement.
STARTING AND OPERATING 599
9. Shift the transmission back into NEUTRAL.
NOTE:
10. With the transmission and transfer case in NEU- • Steps 1 through 4 are requirements that must be met
TRAL, press and hold the ENGINE START/STOP
before pressing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must
button until the engine turns off. Turning the engine
continue to be met until the shift has been completed.
off will automatically place the transmission in
If any of these requirements are not met before pressPARK.
ing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer met
during the shift, then the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light
11. Press the ENGINE STOP/START button again (withwill flash continuously until all requirements are met
out pressing the brake pedal), if needed, to turn the
or until the NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
ignition switch to the OFF position.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position
12. Firmly apply the parking brake.
for a shift to take place and for the position indicator
13. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable
lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the
ON/RUN position, the shift will not take place and no
tow bar.
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
14. Release the parking brake.
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light
indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
5
600 STARTING AND OPERATING
• If the vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift air sus- 6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, press and hold
the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL (N) button (lopension, the engine should be started and left running
cated by the selector switch) for one second.
for a minimum of 60 seconds (with all the doors
closed) at least once every 24 hours. This process
allows the air suspension to adjust the vehicle’s ride
height to compensate for temperature effects.
Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it connected to the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Start the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
NEUTRAL (N) Switch
STARTING AND OPERATING 601
7. When the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turns off, NOTE:
release the NEUTRAL (N) button. After the NEU• Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met
TRAL (N) button has been released, the transfer case
before pressing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must
will shift to the position indicated by the selector
continue to be met until the shift has been completed.
switch.
If any of these requirements are not met before press8. Shift the transmission into PARK. Turn the engine
ing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer met
OFF.
during the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will
flash continuously until all requirements are met or
9. Release the brake pedal.
until the NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
10. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position
11. Start the engine.
for a shift to take place and for the position indicator
lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the
12. Press and hold the brake pedal.
ON/RUN position, the shift will not take place and no
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
13. Release the parking brake.
14. Shift the transmission into DRIVE, release the brake • A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light
indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
pedal, and check that the vehicle operates normally.
5
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .604
▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .616
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .604 䡵 JUMP-STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605
▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . .607
▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .608
▫ Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .608
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .608
▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .618
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .620
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .622
䡵 EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED . .623
䡵 MANUAL PARK RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .628
▫ Two-Wheel Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .630
▫ Four-Wheel Drive Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631
6
604 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
switch bank just above the climate controls.
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning • On the highways — slow down.
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc- • In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle speed
traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to
while preventing vehicle motion with the brakes.
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
This is an emergency warning system and it should not an impending overheat condition:
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
other motorists.
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even • You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flashers
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
may discharge the battery.
from the engine cooling system.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 605
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT
(H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on HOT (H), and you hear continuous
chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench.
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
130 Ft-Lbs (176 N·m)
M14 x 1.50
Lug Nut/
Bolt Socket
Size
22 mm
**Use only your Authorized Dealer recommended lug
nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before
tightening.
6
606 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
against the wheel.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
Torque Patterns
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 607
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
(Continued)
6
608 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
into the filler neck and proceed to fill the vehicle. For
vehicles not equipped with a spare tire, the fuel filler
The scissor-type jack and tire changing tools are located
funnel is stored in the left storage bin under the load
in rear cargo area, below the load floor.
floor. For more information on the Cap-Less Fuel System
refer to “Adding Fuel” in “Starting And Operating” in
this manual.
Jack Location
Spare Tire Stowage
The spare tire is stowed under the load floor in the rear
cargo area and is secured to the body with a special wing
nut.
Preparations For Jacking
CAUTION!
Jack Storage Location
NOTE: The funnel for the Cap-Less Fuel System is
located on top of the spare tire. If your vehicle is out of
fuel and an auxiliary fuel can is needed, insert the funnel
Always lift or jack the vehicle from the correct
jacking points. Failure to follow this information
could cause damage to the vehicle or underbody
components.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 609
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
slippery surfaces.
when the vehicle is being jacked.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For example, if changing the right front tire,
block the left rear wheel.
7. For vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift, refer to “QuadraLift — If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information on disabling automatic leveling.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Chock the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
(Continued)
6
610 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
Jack Warning Label
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and tools from storage.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 611
2. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
turning them to the left, one turn, while the wheel is
still on the ground.
3. Assemble the jack and jacking tools.
6
Jacking Locations
Jack And Tool Assembly
612 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. For the front axle, place the jack on the body flange
just behind the front tire as indicated by the triangular
lift point symbol on the sill molding. Do not raise the
vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged.
Front Jacking Location
Lift Point Symbol On Sill Molding
5. For a rear tire, place the jack in the slot on the rear
tie-down bracket, just forward of the rear tire (as
indicated by the triangular lift point symbol on the sill
molding). Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure
the jack is fully engaged.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 613
CAUTION!
Do NOT raise the vehicle by the body side sill
molding. Be sure the jack is placed in the proper
engagement location on the inside of the panel.
Damage of the vehicle may occur if the procedure is
not properly followed.
6
Lift Point Symbol On Sill Molding
614 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
7. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
8. Position the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle and install
the lug nuts with the cone-shaped end toward the
wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts.
Rear Jacking Location
6. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise.
Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the
surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the
spare tire. Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 615
9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw counterclockwise, and remove the jack and wheel blocks.
10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until
each nut has been tightened twice. For correct lug nut
torque refer to Torque Specifications in this section. If
in doubt about the correct tightness, have them
checked with a torque wrench by your authorized
dealer or at a service station.
Mounting Spare Tire
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
11. Lower the jack to the fully closed position and return
it and the tools to the proper positions in the foam
tray.
12. Remove the small center cap and securely store the
road wheel in the cargo area.
6
616 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: Do not drive with the spare tire installed for more
than 50 miles (80 km) at a max speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h).
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
Stowed Spare
Road Tire Installation
13. Have the aluminum road wheel and tire repaired as 1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
soon as possible, properly secure the spare tire with
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
the special wing nut torqued to 3.7 ft-lbs (5 N·m),
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
reinstall the jack and tool kit foam tray, and latch the
lug nuts.
rear load floor cover.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 617
WARNING!
JUMP-STARTING
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
WARNING!
4. Refer to Torque Specifications for proper lug nut
torque.
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
6
618 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located under the passenger’s front seat. There are remote locations located under
the hood to assist in jump-starting.
Remote Battery Posts
1 — Remote Positive (+) Post (covered with protective cap)
2 — Remote Negative (-) Post
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 619
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
NOTE: Be sure that the disconnected ends of the cables
do not touch while still connected to the either vehicle.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
3. Remove the protective cover over the remote positive
(+) battery post. Pull upward on the cover to remove
it.
4. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
6
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
620 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Jump-Starting Procedure
Connecting The Jumper Cables
WARNING!
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
NOTE: Make sure at all times that unused ends of
jumper cables are not contacting each other or either
vehicle while making connections.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post
of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do
not use any other exposed metal parts.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 621
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster 2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
battery.
from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
CAUTION!
Do not run the booster vehicle engine above 2000
rpm since it provides no charging benefit, wastes
fuel and can damage booster vehicle engine.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
5. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote positive
(+) post of the discharged vehicle.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
in the reverse sequence:
you should have the battery and charging system tested
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
at your authorized dealer.
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable
from the remote negative (-) post of the discharged
vehicle.
6
622 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation,
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
NOTE: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for
more than two seconds, you must press the brake pedal
to engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that
will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the
wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE: Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch (if necessary), to place
the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
Off⬙ mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “ElecIf your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
tronic Brake Control” in “Starting And Operating” for
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
further information. Once the vehicle has been freed,
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙
front wheels. Push and hold the lock button on the gear
mode.
selector. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and
REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 623
WARNING!
CAUTION! (Continued)
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
CAUTION!
• Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead
to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the
engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL
for at least one minute after every five rockingmotion cycles. This will minimize overheating and
(Continued)
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, there will be
one in the rear and two mounted on the front of the
vehicle. The rear hook will be located on the driver’s side
of the vehicle.
6
624 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use MANUAL PARK RELEASE
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of
damage to the vehicle.
WARNING!
WARNING!
• Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle.
Chains may break, causing serious injury or death.
• Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
hooks. Tow straps may become disengaged, causing serious injury.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a
vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for
tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could
damage your vehicle.
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the
parking brake, before activating the Manual Park
Release. Activating the Manual Park Release will
allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by
the parking brake or by proper connection to a tow
vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on an
unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or
death for those in or around the vehicle.
In order to move the vehicle in cases where the transmission will not shift out of PARK (such as a dead battery),
a Manual Park Release is available.
Follow these steps to use the Manual Park Release:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 625
2. Open the center console and locate the Manual Park 3. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, push the metal
Release cover, remove it by snapping the cover away
latch in towards the tether strap.
from the console hinges.
6
Release Latch
Manual Park Release Cover
626 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. While the metal latch is in the open position, simultaneously pull upwards on the tether strap until the
lever clicks and latches in the released position. The
transmission is now out of PARK and the vehicle can
be moved.
CAUTION!
Closing the armrest while the Manual Park Release is
activated may damage the Manual Park Release
mechanism, the transmission, and/or the armrest.
NOTE: To prevent the vehicle from rolling unintentionally, firmly apply the parking brake.
To Disengage the Manual Park Release Lever:
1. To disengage the Manual Park Release apply tension
upward while pushing the release latch towards the
tether to unlock the lever.
Released Position
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 627
6
Release Latch
Stowed Position
2. Once the tension has been released and the lever has NOTE: Be sure to replace the cover by snapping it back
been unlocked be sure it is stowed properly and locks in place.
into position.
628 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service. If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, disabled vehicles
may also be towed as described under “Recreational
Towing” in the “Starting and Operating” section.
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift must be
placed in Transport mode, before tying them down (from
the body) on a trailer or flatbed truck. Refer to the section
on Quadra-Lift for more information. If the vehicle
cannot be placed in Transport mode (for example, engine
will not run), tie-downs must be fastened to the axles (not
to the body). Failure to follow these instructions may
cause fault codes to be set and/or cause loss of proper
tie-down tension.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 629
Towing Condition
Wheels OFF the
Ground
Two-Wheel Drive
Models
Flat Tow
NONE
NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow
On Trailer
Front
Rear
ALL
NOT ALLOWED
OK
OK
Four-Wheel Drive
Models Without
4WD LOW Range
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
Four-Wheel Drive
Models With 4WD
LOW Range
See Instructions
• Transmission in
PARK
• Transfer case in
NEUTRAL (N)
• Tow in forward
direction
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
equipment designed for this purpose, following equip- vehicles under tow must be observed.
ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
6
630 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) Two-Wheel Drive Models
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
position, not the ACC position.
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmisdischarged, refer to “Manual Park Release” in this section sion is operable, the vehicle may be towed (with rear
for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:
for towing.
• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL. Refer to
⬙Manual Park Release⬙ in this section for instructions
CAUTION!
on shifting the transmission to NEUTRAL when the
• Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
engine is off.
Vehicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, do • The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
not attach to front or rear suspension components. • The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles (48 km).
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be
towing.
towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than 30
miles (48 km), tow with the rear wheels OFF the ground.
Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed,
or with the front wheels raised and the rear wheels on a
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 631
towing dolly, or (when using a suitable steering wheel
stabilizer to hold the front wheels in the straight position)
with the rear wheels raised and the front wheels on the
ground.
CAUTION!
Towing faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than
30 miles (48 km) with rear wheels on the ground can
cause severe transmission damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Four-Wheel Drive Models
The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the
vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of vehicle raised and
the opposite end on a towing dolly.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transfer
case is operable, vehicles with a two-speed transfer case
may be towed (in the forward direction, with ALL wheels
on the ground), IF the transfer case is in NEUTRAL (N)
and the transmission is in PARK. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for detailed instructions.
6
632 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Vehicles equipped with a single-speed transfer case have
no NEUTRAL position, and therefore must be towed
with all four wheels OFF the ground.
CAUTION!
• Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used. Internal
damage to the transmission or transfer case will
occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when
towing.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or
transfer case damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L . . . . . . . . . .635
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .641
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L . . . . . . . . . .636
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .645
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II) . . .637
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .645
▫ Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637
▫ Accessory Drive Belt Inspection . . . . . . . . . . .648
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . .638
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640
䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .641
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .651
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .656
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .657
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .665
7
634 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .665
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .674
▫ Front/Rear Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .676
▫ Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .677
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .677
▫ High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .700
▫ Halogen Headlamps — If Equipped . . . . . . . .701
▫ Front Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .701
▫ Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .701
▫ Rear Tail, Stop, and Turn Signal Lamps . . . . . .702
▫ Rear Liftgate Mounted Tail Lamp . . . . . . . . . .704
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .679
▫ Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) . .705
䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .687
▫ Rear License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .705
▫ Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .688 䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .706
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .696 䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND
PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .697
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .700
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GENUINE
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .707
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .707
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .709
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 635
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L
7
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal
Engine Oil Dipstick
Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
Coolant Pressure Cap (Reservoir)
Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal
6
7
8
9
— Engine Oil Fill
— Brake Fluid Reservoir
— Air Cleaner Filter
— Washer Fluid Reservoir
636 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal
Engine Oil Dipstick
Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator)
Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal
6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
7 — Engine Oil Fill
8 — Brake Fluid Reservoir
9 — Air Cleaner Filter
10— Washer Fluid Reservoir
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 637
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing, while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic
system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to
information related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may need to
7
638 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
access this information to assist with the diagnosis and For further information, refer to “Privacy Practices — If
service of your vehicle and emissions system.
Equipped With Uconnect 8.4 Radio” and “Uconnect
CyberSecurity” in “All About Uconnect Access” in your
Owner’s Manual Radio Supplement and “Cybersecurity”
WARNING!
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”.
• ONLY an authorized service technician should connect equipment to the OBD II connection port in EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
order to diagnose or service your vehicle.
PROGRAMS
• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
OBD II connection port, such as a driver-behavior
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
tracking device, it may:
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
• Be possible that vehicle systems, including
For states that require an Inspection and Maintesafety related systems, could be impaired or a
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
loss of vehicle control could occur that may result
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
in an accident involving serious injury or death.
• Access, or allow others to access, information on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
stored in your vehicle systems, including per- system is ready for testing.
sonal information.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 639
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II 3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
happen:
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which
you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if
not proceed to the I/M station.
your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
following:
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off
position or start the engine. This means that your
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
not crank or start the engine.
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed
to the I/M station.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
start this test over.
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
position, you will see the “Malfunction Indicator Light
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
(MIL)” symbol come on as part of a normal bulb
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
check.
7
640 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine DEALER SERVICE
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personRegardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced available which include detailed service information for
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine attempting any procedure yourself.
running.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor
vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the
knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take
your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 641
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
CAUTION! (Continued)
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components
which may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
(Continued)
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission, or air conditioning. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a flush is needed because of component malfunction, use only the specified fluid for the flushing
procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle’s engine, the
engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check
the oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.
7
642 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The best time to check the engine oil level is about five Change Engine Oil
minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off.
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Always Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informamaintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the tion.
dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change interthe bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or
top of the safe zone on these engines.
350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage
your engine.
350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a
concern for fleet customers.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 643
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
This symbol means that the oil has recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
been certified by the American Petro- the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395.
leum Institute (API). The manufacEngine Oil Viscosity — 3.6L Engine
turer only recommends API Certified
MOPAR SAE 0W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material
engine oils.
Standard MS-6366 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or
equivalent is recommended for all operating temperaThis symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30, 5W-30 and tures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting
10W-30 engine oils.
and vehicle fuel economy.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Compartment” illustration in this section.
7
644 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi- Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num- fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.
ber should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 5.7L Engine
Synthetic Engine Oils
MOPAR SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or
equivalent is recommended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting
and vehicle fuel economy.
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on number should not be used.
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine ComMaterials Added To Engine Oil
partment” illustration in this section.
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the adNOTE: Vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine must use dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
SAE 5W-20 oil. Failure to do so may result in improper
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
operation of the Fuel Saver Technology. Refer to “Fuel
performance may be impaired by supplemental addiSaver Technology – If Equipped” in “Starting And Opertives.
ating” for further information.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 645
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in the “Mainteoil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, nance Schedules” section for the proper maintenance
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the intervals.
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where
WARNING!
used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
Engine Oil Filter
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
at every engine oil change.
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
Engine Oil Filter Selection
near the engine compartment before starting the
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high serious personal injury.
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR engine oil filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
7
646 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters 1. Release the spring clips from the air cleaner cover.
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
Gasoline Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Replacement
Inspect engine air cleaner filter for dirt and or debris, if
you find evidence of either dirt or debris you should
change your air cleaner filter.
Air Cleaner Filter Cover
1 — Clean Air Hose Clamp
2 — Air Hose
3 — Spring Clips
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 647
2. Lift the air cleaner cover to access the air cleaner filter. 3. Remove the air cleaner filter element from the housing
assembly.
7
Open Air Cleaner Filter Assembly
1 — Air Cleaner Cover
2 — Air Cleaner Filter
Air Cleaner Filter
1 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Air Cleaner Filter Inspection Surface
648 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
WARNING! (Continued)
NOTE: Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is
present before replacing the air filter element.
1. Install the air cleaner filter element into the housing
assembly with the air cleaner filter inspection surface
facing downward.
2. Install the air cleaner cover onto the housing assembly
locating tabs.
3. Latch the spring clips and lock the air cleaner cover to
the housing assembly.
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt
with vehicle running.
(Continued)
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time regardless of
ignition switch position. You could be injured by
the moving fan blades.
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small cracks that
run across ribbed surface of belt from rib to rib, are
considered normal. These are not a reason to replace belt.
However, cracks running along a rib (not across) are not
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 649
normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib must be • Rib or belt wear
replaced. Also have the belt replaced if it has excessive
• Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs)
wear, frayed cords or severe glazing.
• Belt slips
• “Groove jumping⬙ (belt does not maintain correct
position on pulley)
• Belt broken (note: identify and correct problem before
new belt is installed)
• Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is
heard or felt while drive belt is in operation)
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component
such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully
inspected for damage and proper alignment.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
Belt replacement on some models requires the use of
special tools, we recommend having your vehicle ser• Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated from belt viced at an authorized dealer.
body)
Conditions that would require replacement:
7
650 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Maintenance-Free Battery
WARNING! (Continued)
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
(Continued)
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive
(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 651
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
7
652 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a — If
Equipped
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R1234yf — If
Equipped
R-1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoolefine HFO that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product with a low
GWP (Global Warming Potential). However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be
performed by authorized dealer or other service facilities
using recovery and recycling equipment.
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How- PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 653
Air Conditioning Filter Replacement (A/C Air
Filter)
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Do not remove the A/C air filter while the vehicle is
running, or while the ignition is in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. With the A/C air filter removed and
the blower operating, the blower can contact hands
and may propel dirt and debris into your eyes,
resulting in personal injury.
7
Glove Compartment
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stops
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind 2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
the glove compartment. Perform the following procedure 3 — Glove Compartment Door
to replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all contents.
654 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. There are glove compartment travel stops on both
sides of the glove compartment door, partially close
the glove compartment door and push inward to
release the glove compartment travel stop on one side
and repeat this procedure for the opposite side.
3. Pull the right hand side of the glove compartment
door toward the rear of the vehicle to disengage the
glove compartment door from its hinges.
NOTE: When disengaging the glove compartment door
from its hinges, there will be some resistance.
4. With the glove compartment door loose, remove the
Right Side Of Glove Compartment
glove compartment tension tether and tether clip by
sliding the clip toward the face of the glove compart- 1 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
2 — Glove Compartment Door
ment door and lifting the clip out of glove compartment door.
5. Remove the filter cover by disengaging the retaining
tab and mid way snap that secures the filter cover to
the HVAC housing. Disengage the mid way snap by
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 655
pulling the door outward. Unhinge the filter cover on 6. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of
the right side to fully remove the cover.
the housing.
7. Install the A/C air filter with the arrow on the filter
pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter
cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the
cover.
CAUTION!
The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure
to properly install the filter will result in the need to
replace it more often.
A/C Air Filter Cover
1 — Retaining Tab
2 — Mid Way Snap
3 — Filter Cover Hinge
7
656 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease,
such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to
the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after
lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
9. Push the door to the near closed position to reengage
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching
the glove compartment travel stops.
components to ensure proper function. When performing
NOTE: Ensure the glove compartment door hinges and other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
glove compartment travel stops are fully engaged.
8. Reinstall the glove compartment door on the glove
compartment door hinge and reattach the glove compartment tension tether by inserting the tether clip in
the glove compartment and sliding the clip away from
the face of the glove compartment door.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR Lock
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
Body Lubrication
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 657
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected
periodically, not just when wiper performance problems
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
are experienced. This inspection should include the folwindshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
lowing points:
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film.
• Wear Or Uneven Edges
Windshield Wiper Blades
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods • Foreign Material
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt • Hardening Or Cracking
from a dry windshield.
• Deformation Or Fatigue
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace the
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do not
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
7
658 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against
the glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass
may be damaged.
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off of the
glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position
1 — Wiper
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 659
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm, flip
up the release tab on the wiper blade and while
holding the wiper arm with one hand, slide the wiper
blade down towards the base of the wiper arm.
7
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
660 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the wiper
blade from the wiper arm by holding the wiper arm
with one hand and separating the wiper blade from
the wiper arm with the other hand (move the wiper
blade toward the right side of the vehicle to separate
the wiper blade from the wiper arm).
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Release Tab
4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 661
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper
arm and rotate the wiper blade until it is flush against
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the wiper arm
the wiper arm. Fold down the latch release tab and
is in the full up position.
snap it into its locked position. Latch engagement will
2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on the tip of the
be accompanied by an audible click.
wiper arm with the wiper release tab open and the
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
blade side of the wiper facing up and away from the
windshield.
Installing The Front Wipers
3. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm through the
opening in the wiper blade under the release tab.
7
662 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from the glass
to allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the
glass.
NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the
glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped first.
Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm without
unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may damage the
vehicle.
Wiper Pivot Cap In Unlocked Position
1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2 — Wiper Arm
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 663
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
3. To remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm, grasp
the bottom end of the wiper blade nearest to wiper
arm with your right hand. With your left hand hold
the wiper arm as you pull the wiper blade away from
the wiper arm past its stop far enough to unsnap the
wiper blade pivot pin from the receptacle on the end
of the wiper arm.
NOTE: Resistance will be accompanied by an audible
snap.
7
Wiper Blade In Folded Out Position
1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Wiper Blade
664 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Still grasping the bottom end of the wiper blade, move 5. Gently lower the tip of the wiper arm onto the glass.
the wiper blade upward and away from the wiper arm
Installing The Rear Wiper
to disengage.
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from the glass
to allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the
glass.
NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the
glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped first.
Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm without
unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may damage the
vehicle.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Wiper Blade
Wiper Blade Pivot Pin
Wiper Arm
Wiper Arm Receptacle
3. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the opening on
the end of the wiper arm. Grab the bottom end of the
wiper arm with one hand, and press the wiper blade
flush with the wiper arm until it snaps into place.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 665
4. Lower the wiper blade onto the glass and snap the in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
wiper arm pivot cap back into place.
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
Adding Washer Fluid
containers.
This vehicle is equipped with a Driver Information
Display (DID), the DID will indicate when the washer
WARNING!
fluid level is low. When the sensor detects a low fluid
level, the windshield will light on the vehicle graphic Commercially available windshield washer solvents
outline and the “WASHER FLUID LOW” message will be are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
displayed.
the washer solution.
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
rear window washer is shared. The fluid reservoir is Exhaust System
located in the engine compartment, be sure to check the
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
windshield washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze).
system.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
clean the wiper blades, this will help blade performance. or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
7
666 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING! (Continued)
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer to
“Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
(Continued)
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 667
CAUTION! (Continued)
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic conmotion.
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure • Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
7
668 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the
system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with
fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an
authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C condenser
for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by
gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically
down the face of the condenser.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at
the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the
entire system for leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 669
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead
to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system, please contact your
local authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to
MS.90032).
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
(Continued)
7
670 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the engine coolant and may
plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
Adding Coolant
MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentraYour vehicle has been built with an improved engine
tions (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that al(−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact your authorized
lows extended maintenance intervals. This engine cooldealer for assistance.
ant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000
miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reduc- • Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
ing this extended maintenance period, it is important that
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conformwill reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
ing to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
engine cooling system.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 671
NOTE:
Cooling System Pressure Cap
• It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is
operated.
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery tank.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
WARNING!
needed to be added to the system, please contact your
local authorized dealer.
• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recomengine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the
possible.
system is hot or under pressure.
(Continued)
7
672 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap
unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze
point or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant
of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once
a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets
the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032
should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 673
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
for leaks.
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor- • Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporprotection of your engine which contains aluminum
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
components.
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
Points To Remember
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no • Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
condenser clean.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (anti- • Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY
freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in
expansion bottle must also be protected against freezunsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance,
ing.
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
7
674 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Brake System
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under the hood service, or immediately if the brake system warning lamp indicates system
failure.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
The brake master cylinder has a plastic reservoir. On the
outboard side of the reservoir, there is a “MAX” mark
and a “MIN” mark. The fluid level must be kept within
these two dots. Do not add fluid above the MAX mark,
because leakage may occur at the cap.
With disc brakes, the fluid level can be expected to fall as
the brake linings wear. However, an unexpected drop in
fluid level may be caused by a leak and a system check
should be conducted.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 675
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
(Continued)
7
676 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Front/Rear Axle Fluid
Rear Axle Fluid Level Check
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the
exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be inspected. If
gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level. Refer to
“Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining
Your Vehicle” for further information.
The rear axle oil level needs to be no lower than 1/8 in (3
mm) below the bottom of the fill hole.
Front Axle Fluid Level Check
The front axle oil level needs to be no lower than 1/8 in
(3 mm) below the bottom of the fill hole.
The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to
22 to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 N·m).
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the plugs as it could damage them
and cause them to leak.
Selection Of Lubricant
The front axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer
22 to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 N·m).
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the plugs as it could damage them
and cause them to leak.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 677
Transfer Case
Fluid Level Check
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
the exterior surfaces of the transfer case assembly should
be inspected. If oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid
level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
When installing plugs, do not overtighten. You could
damage them and cause them to leak.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Adding Fluid
Automatic Transmission
Add fluid at the filler hole, until it runs out of the hole,
Selection Of Lubricant
when the vehicle is in a level position.
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
Drain
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
First remove fill plug, then remove drain plug. Recom- only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid.
mended tightening torque for drain and fill plugs is 15 to Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in this
section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain
25 ft lbs (20 to 34 N·m).
the transmission fluid at the correct level using the
recommended fluid.
7
678 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: No chemical flushes should be used in any trans- to the transmission. Avoid using transmission sealers as
they may adversely affect seals.
mission; only the approved lubricant should be used.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Special Additives
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
any special additives in the transmission.
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
check your transmission fluid level using special service
product and its performance may be impaired by suppletools.
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 679
If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction,
visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the
transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle
with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission damage.
CAUTION!
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes
contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
disassembled for any reason.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and chemicals that are sprayed
on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are
highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contamiFluid And Filter Changes
nants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated,
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme condithe factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the
tions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and
life of the vehicle.
underbody protection.
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper
tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
7
680 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The following maintenance recommendations will enable Washing
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion • Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your veresistance built into your vehicle.
hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash, or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
What Causes Corrosion?
clear water.
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumupaint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug
The most common causes are:
and Tar Remover to remove.
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR
• Stone and gravel impact.
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 681
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274
kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and
decals.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
packaged and sealed.
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and • Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
open.
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
Special Care
7
682 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using
mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster
and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same
soap solution recommended for the body of the vehicle.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by
salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or
control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and
mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s
protective coating that helps keep them from corroding
and tarnishing.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh
brushes. These products and automatic car washes
may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel
Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire
and wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent
damage to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or
NOTE: Many aftermarket wheel cleaners contain strong
chrome wheels. Do not use any products on Dark Vapor
acids or strong alkaline additives that can harm the wheel
or Black Satin Chrome Wheels. They will permanently
surface.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 683
damage this finish and such damage is not covered by Dark Vapor Or Black Satin Chrome Wheels
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing
so. Driving the vehicle and applying the brakes when
stopping will reduce the risk of brake rotor corrosion.
If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or Black
Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,
abrasives or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage this finish and such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE
ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis this is all that is
required to maintain this finish.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner:
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
7
684 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR Total Clean, or a mild
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain.
Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
Interior Care
Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 685
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
CAUTION!
Damage caused by these type of products may not be
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
7
686 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may
be used, but do not use high alcohol content or
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a
with MOPAR Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
clean damp cloth.
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win- 2. Dry with a soft cloth.
dow equipped with electric defrosters or windows
Seat Belt Maintenance
equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements.
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR Total Clean, a mild
directly on the mirror.
soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove the
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
Glass Surfaces
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 687
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never
replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other
material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in
serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp
rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse
(Continued)
7
688 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Power Distribution Center
The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine
compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge fuses, micro fuses, relays, and circuit breakers. A
description of each fuse and component may be stamped
on the inside cover, otherwise the cavity number of each
fuse is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to
the following chart.
Power Distribution Center
Cavity
F03
F05
Cartridge Fuse
60 Amp Yellow
40 Amp Green
Micro Fuse
–
–
Description
Radiator Fan
Compressor for Air Suspension If Equipped
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 689
Cavity
F06
Cartridge Fuse
40 Amp Green
Micro Fuse
–
F07
F09
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
–
–
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F17
F19
F20
F22
F23
40 Amp Green
30 Amp Pink
40 Amp Green
40 Amp Green
40 Amp Green
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue
30 Amp Pink
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Description
Anti-lock Brakes/Electronic Stability
Control Pump
Starter Solenoid
Diesel Fuel Heater (Diesel engine only) /
Brake Vacuum Pump
Body Controller / Exterior Lighting #2
Trailer Tow Electric Brake - If Equipped
Body Controller #3 / Power Locks
Blower Motor Front
Body Controller #4 / Exterior Lighting #1
Headlamp Washer- If Equipped
Headrest Solenoid- If Equipped
Passenger Door Module
Engine Control Module
Interior Lights #1
7
690 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
F24
F25
F26
Cartridge Fuse
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
Micro Fuse
–
–
–
F28
F29
F30
F32
F34
F35
F36
F37
F38
F39
20 Amp Blue
20 Amp Blue
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
25 Amp Clear
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Description
Driver Door Module
Front Wipers
Anti-lock Brakes/Stability Control
Module/Valves
Trailer Tow Backup Lights - If Equipped
Trailer Tow Parking Lights - If Equipped
Trailer Tow Receptacle - If Equipped
Drive Train Control Module
Slip Differential Control
Sunroof - If Equipped
Rear Defroster
Rear Blower Motor - If Equipped
Power Inverter 115V AC - If Equipped
Power Liftgate - If Equipped
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 691
Cavity
F40
Cartridge Fuse
–
Micro Fuse
10 Amp Red
F42
F44
F49
F50
–
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
F51
–
15 Amp Blue
F52
F53
–
–
5 Amp Tan
20 Amp Yellow
F56
F57
F58
–
–
–
15 Amp Blue
20 Amp Yellow
15 Amp Blue
Description
Daytime Running Lights/Headlamp
Leveling
Horn
Diagnostic Port
Integrated Central Stack / Climate Control
Air Suspension Control Module If Equipped
Ignition Node Module / Keyless Ignition
/ Steering Column Lock
Battery Sensor
Trailer Tow – Left Turn/Stop Lights If Equipped
Additional Content (Diesel engine only)
NOX Sensor
HID Headlamps LH - If Equipped
7
692 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
F59
F60
F61
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–
Micro Fuse
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red
F62
F63
F64
F66
–
–
–
–
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
25 Amp Clear
10 Amp Red
F67
–
15 Amp Blue
F68
F69
F70
F71
–
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
15 Amp Blue
20 Amp Yellow
30 Amp Green
Description
Purging Pump (Diesel engine only)
Transmission Control Module
Transmission Control Module/PM Sensor
(Diesel engine only)
Air Conditioning Clutch
Ignition Coils (Gas), Urea Heater (Diesel)
Fuel Injectors / Powertrain
Sunroof / Passenger Window Switches /
Rain Sensor
CD / DVD / Bluetooth Hands-free
Module - If Equipped
Rear Wiper Motor
Spotlight Feed - If Equipped
Fuel Pump Motor
Audio Amplifier
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 693
Cavity
F72
F73
F75
F76
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–
–
Micro Fuse
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
F77
–
10 Amp Red
F78
–
10 Amp Red
F80
–
10 Amp Red
F81
F82
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
F83
–
10 Amp Red
Description
PCM (If Equipped)
HID Headlamp RH - If Equipped
Dual Batt Control (If Equipped)
Anti-lock Brakes/Electronic Stability
Control
Drivetrain Control Module/Front Axle
Disconnect Module
Engine Control Module / Electric Power
Steering
Universal Garage Door Opener / Compass
/ Anti-Intrusion Module
Trailer Tow Right Turn/Stop Lights
Steering Column Control Module/ Cruise
Control / DTV
Fuel Door
7
694 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
F84
F85
F86
F87
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–
–
Micro Fuse
15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
F88
F90/F91
F92
F93
F94
F95
F96
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15 Amp Blue
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
F97
–
20 Amp Yellow
Description
Switch Bank/Instrument Cluster
Airbag Module
Airbag Module
Air Suspension – If Equipped / Trailer
Tow / Steering Column Control Module
Instrument Panel Cluster
Power Outlet (Rear seats) Selectable
Rear Console Lamp - If Equipped
Cigar Lighter
Shifter / Transfer Case Module
Rear Camera / ParkSense
Rear Seat Heater Switch / Flashlamp
Charger - If Equipped
Rear Heated Seats & Heated Steering
Wheel - If Equipped
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 695
Cavity
F98
F99
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
Micro Fuse
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
F100
F101
–
–
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
F103
–
10 Amp Red
F104
–
20 Amp Yellow
Description
Front Heated Seats - If Equipped
Climate Control / Driver Assistance
Systems Module / DSRC
Active Damping - If Equipped
Electrochromatic Mirror/Smart High
Beams - If Equipped
Cabin Heater (Diesel Engine Only)/Rear
HVAC
Power Outlets (Instrument Panel/Center
Console)
7
696 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly
positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
allow water to get into the power distribution
center and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
days you may want to take steps to protect your battery.
You may:
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 697
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Bulbs
Glove Compartment Lamp
Grab Handle Lamp
Overhead Console Reading Lamps
Rear Cargo Lamp
Visor Vanity Lamp
Underpanel Courtesy Lamps
Instrument Cluster (General Illumination)
Telltale/Hazard Lamp
Bulb Number
194
L002825W5W
VT4976
214–2
V26377
906
103
74
7
698 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Exterior Bulbs
Headlamps (Low Beam) - If Equipped
Premium Headlamps (Low/High Beam)
Headlamps (High Beam) - If Equipped
Premium Park/Turn Signal Lamp
Premium Daytime Running Lamp (DRL)
Front Fog Lamps
Front Side Marker - If Equipped
Premium Front Side Marker - If Equipped
Front Park/Turn Lamp - If Equipped
Rear Body Side Turn Signal Lamps
Auxiliary Liftgate Tail Lamps
Liftgate Backup Lamps
Bulb Number
H11
D3S (Service at Authorized Dealer)
9005
LED - (Service at Authorized Dealer)
LED - (Service at Authorized Dealer)
H11
W5W
LED - (Service at Authorized Dealer)
7444NA (WY27/8W)
7440NA (WY21W)
LED - (Service at Authorized Dealer)
921 (W16W)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 699
Rear License Lamps
Rear Body Side Stop Lamps
Rear Body Side Tail Lamps
CHMSL - Center High Mounted Stop Lamp
Bulb Number
LED - (Service at Authorized Dealer)
3157KRD LCP
LED - (Service at Authorized Dealer)
LED - (Service at Authorized Dealer)
NOTE: Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from your authorized dealer.
If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual.
7
700 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
BULB REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
conditions change to allow the condensation to change
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually
accelerate the clearing process.
High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID) — If
Equipped
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps when the
headlamp switch is turned ON. It may cause serious
electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized dealer for service.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps, when the headlamps are
The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
turned on, there is a blue hue to the lamps. This diminHigh voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
ishes and becomes more white after approximately 10
headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of
seconds, as the system charges.
this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb
yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to
an authorized dealer for service.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 701
Halogen Headlamps — If Equipped
1. Open the hood.
2. Turn the low or high beam bulb one–quarter turn
counterclockwise to remove from housing.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Front Turn Signal
1. Open the hood.
2. Turn the turn signal bulb one–quarter turn counterclockwise to remove from housing.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the
bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Front Fog Lamps
1. Reach through the cutout in the splash shield and
disconnect the wiring harness from the fog lamp
connector.
2. Firmly grasp the bulb by the two latches and squeeze
them together to unlock the bulb from the back of the
front fog lamp housing.
7
702 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed opening in 5. Insert the bulb into the housing until the index tabs are
the housing.
engaged in the slots of the collar.
CAUTION!
• Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If
the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface,
clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
• Always use the correct bulb size and type for
replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may
overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket
or the lamp wiring.
4. Align the index tabs of the front fog lamp bulb with
the slots in the collar of the bulb opening on the back
of the front fog lamp housing.
6. Firmly and evenly push the bulb straight into the lamp
housing until both tabs snap firmly into place and are
fully engaged.
7. Connect the wiring harness to the front fog lamp
connector.
Rear Tail, Stop, and Turn Signal Lamps
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Remove the two push-pins from the tail lamp housing.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 703
3. Grasp the tail lamp and pull firmly rearward to
disengage the lamp from the aperture panel.
Rear Of Tail Lamp
Tail Lamp Push Pins
1 — Rear Stop Lamp Bulb Socket
2 — LED Tail Connector – Do Not Remove
3 — Rear Turn Signal Bulb Socket
4. Twist socket counter clockwise and remove from
5. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
lamp.
6. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket, and reattach the
lamp assembly.
7
704 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Tail lamps are now visible. Rotate socket(s) counter
Rear Liftgate Mounted Tail Lamp
clockwise.
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Use a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver to pry the
lower trim from the liftgate.
3. Continue removing the trim.
4. Disconnect the two trim panel lights.
Rear Of Liftgate Tail Lamp
1 — Auxiliary LED Tail Connector – Do Not Remove
2 — Backup Bulb Socket
Rear Liftgate Tail Lamps
6. Remove/replace bulb(s).
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 705
7. Reinstall the socket(s)
Rear License Lamp
8. Reverse process to reinstall the liftgate trim.
The rear license lamps are LED. See your authorized
dealer for service.
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The center high mounted stop lamp is LED. Service at
Authorized Dealer.
7
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp
706 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S.
Fuel (Approximate)
3.6L and 5.7L Engines
25 Gallons
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine (SAE 0W-20, API Certified)
6 Quarts
5.7L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
7 Quarts
Cooling System*
3.6L Engine (MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000
10.4 Quarts
Mile Formula or equivalent)
15.4 Quarts
5.7 Liter Engine (MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/
150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) – Without Trailer Tow Package
5.7 Liter Engine (MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/
16 Quarts
150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) – With Trailer Tow Package
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
Metric
94.0 Liters
5.6 Liters
6.6 Liters
9.9 Liters
14.6 Liters
15.2 Liters
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 707
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine
Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 0W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR, Pennzoil, and
Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR, Pennzoil, and
Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
We recommend you use MOPAR Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs.
87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol.
89 Octane Recommended - 87 Octane Acceptable, 0-15% Ethanol.
7
708 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 709
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission
Transfer Case – Single-Speed (Quadra-Trac I)
Transfer Case – Two-Speed (Quadra-Trac II)
Axle Differential (Front)
Axle Differential (Rear) – With Electronic
Limited-Slip Differential (ELSD)
Axle Differential (Rear) – Without Electronic
Limited-Slip Differential (ELSD)
Brake Master Cylinder
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid
or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the
function or performance of your transmission.
We recommend you use Automatic Transmission Fluid 3353.
We recommend you use MOPAR ATF+4 Automatic Transmission
Fluid.
We recommend you use MOPAR GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant
SAE 75W-85.
We recommend you use MOPAR GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant
SAE 75W-85 with friction modifier additive.
We recommend you use MOPAR GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant
SAE 75W-85.
We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703
should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available,
then DOT 4 is acceptable.
7
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . .712
▫ Maintenance Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .714
8
712 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
concern for fleet customers.
scheduled maintenance.
Severe Duty All Models
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser- Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle
vice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions is operated in a dusty and off road environment or is
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or operated predominately at idle or only very low engine
cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe
influence when the “Oil Change Required” message is Duty.
displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
change oil message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles
(5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as • Check engine oil level
soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
• Check windshield washer fluid level
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
• Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual
message after completing the scheduled oil change.
wear or damage
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 713
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
master cylinder and fill as needed.
pages for required maintenance.
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights
Required Maintenance
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter.
Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system
turns on.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and park brake.
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions.
8
714 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect front suspension, tie rod
ends, and replace if necessary.
Inspect the front and rear axle
fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, offroad or frequent trailer towing.
Inspect the brake linings, parking
brake function.
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
20,000
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
32,000
Maintenance Chart
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect transfer case fluid.
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter.
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Replace spark plugs.**
Flush and replace the engine
coolant at 10 years or 150,000
miles (240,000 km) whichever
comes first.
Change transfer case fluid.
Inspect and replace PCV valve if
necessary.
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
20,000
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
32,000
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 715
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
8
X
X
X
X
X
X
716 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .719
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . .721
▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .719
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .721
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .719 䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .723
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .719 䡵 MOPAR PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .723
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .719 䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .723
▫ FCA US LLC Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . . .720
▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . . . . .720
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .721
▫ Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands . . . . . . . .721
▫ In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .723
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .723
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .724
9
718 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . .725
▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .725
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .725
▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .726
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 719
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
current problem.
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
Prepare A List
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the with our products and services.
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
service advisor know.
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
9
720 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and • Authorized dealer name
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
correctly and in a timely manner.
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re- FCA US LLC Customer Center
solved with this process.
P.O. Box 21–8004
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
Phone: (877) 426-5337
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con- FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer P.O. Box 1621
center.
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cenPhone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
ter should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 721
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Tel.: (787) 782-5757
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
Fax: (787) 782-3345
Service Contract
Customer Service Chrysler International Services LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
9
722 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State
of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects,
or other reproductive harm.
WARNING!
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 723
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
DVD, for the terms and provisions of FCA US LLC
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
MOPAR PARTS
WARRANTY INFORMATION
MOPAR fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153),
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
9
724 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans- complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and and/or components is written in straightforward lanRecalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/ guage with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
roadsafety/
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 725
Call toll free at:
Treadwear
• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet
pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
safety requirements in addition to these grades.
9
726 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
INDEX
10
728 INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . .194
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .670
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
Adjust
Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Air Bag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70, 71
Advance Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71, 72
Air Bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Driver Knee Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Enhanced Accident Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70, 71
If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Side Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Air Bag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Air Bag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82, 114, 302
Air Bag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .645
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431, 646, 653
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips. . . . . . . . . . .429, 432
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651, 652
Air Conditioning System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428, 651
Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
Air Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Alarm
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . .20, 305, 310, 334
INDEX 729
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669, 706
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .672
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .679
Arming System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Automatic High Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . .420, 428
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472, 679
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .679
Fluid And Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .679
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .679
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .677, 678
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .677, 709
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) . . . . . . . .271
Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .709
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307, 650
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .26
Belts, Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Blind Spot Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .656
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .674, 709
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511, 674
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
10
730 INDEX
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .674
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .674
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . .111
Bulb Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .697, 700
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .706
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113, 572
Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
Cargo Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .680
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .705
Certification Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .638
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Checks, Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Child Restraints
Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt . . . . . . .102
Infants And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint . . . .101
INDEX 731
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle
Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
LATCH Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . . . .93
Older Children And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . .89
Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .682
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .721
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .671
Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .670
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .706
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .672
Disposal Of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .672
Drain, Flush, And Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668, 672
Points To Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .673
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . .669, 706, 707
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .679
Cruise Control (Speed Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
Cruise Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328, 331
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .719
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640
10
732 INDEX
Defroster, Rear Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .641
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .628
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .672
Door Ajar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Child-Protection Door Lock — Rear Doors . . . . . .37
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Door Opener, Garage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Driver Information Display
DID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
Instrument Cluster Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
Off-Pavement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
DVD Player (Video Entertainment System) . . . . . . .395
Economy (Fuel) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary
(Power Outlet). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
Electric Rear Window Defrost. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Electronic Roll Mitigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
Electronic Speed Control
(Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189, 190, 194
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . . . . . . .308
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604
INDEX 733
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617
Tow Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .638
Engine
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .645
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .635, 636
Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . .635, 636
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .707
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113, 572
Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567, 706
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .641, 706, 707
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .645
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643, 706
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643, 644
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Exhaust Gas Caution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113, 572
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113, 665
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .645
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431, 646, 653
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .645, 707
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .645
10
734 INDEX
Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116, 327, 701, 702
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .709
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .706
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .674
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .641
Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . .707
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .701
Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .701
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Forward Collision Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Four-Way Hazard Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604
Four Wheel Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482, 490
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Four Wheel Drive Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622
Front Axle (Differential). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .676
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568
Economy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567, 707
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567, 706
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .706
Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573
INDEX 735
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) . . . . . . . . . .255, 261
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217, 566
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .686
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .701
Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
Headlight Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135, 289
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
Hill Descent Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
Hill Start Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener). . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Hazard Warning Flasher
Headlights . . . . . . . . . .
Bulb Replacement . . .
Cleaning . . . . . . . . .
On With Wipers . . . .
Passing . . . . . . . . . .
Ignition
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125, 126
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298, 306, 307, 327
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .687
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.604
.700
.701
.685
.172
.180
10
736 INDEX
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . .20, 26
Instrument Panel And Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .20, 26
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .686
Unlock Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .684
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . .182 Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39, 460
Lock The Vehicle’s Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
Inverter, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
Passive Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
iPod Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . .39, 364
iPod/USB/MP3 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
Unlock Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49, 364
Bluetooth Streaming Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609 Keyless Go. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607, 608 Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617 Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
Key Fob
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Disarm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567
INDEX 737
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Light Bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116, 170
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82, 114, 302
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .702
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .700
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .705
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328, 331
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .701
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .700, 701
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . .313
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326, 328
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177, 253
Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .702
Rear Tail Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .702
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .700
Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .702
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .316
10
738 INDEX
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116, 170, 327, 701, 702
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .306, 327
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
Load Shed
Battery Saver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
Battery Saver On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
Electrical Load Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
Intelligent Battery Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .656
Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605
Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .641
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .712
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . .313, 638
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .724
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Memory Seats And Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125, 126
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560
INDEX 739
MOPAR Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640, 723
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643, 706
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643, 644, 706
Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .645
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .645
Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink) . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Overhead Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . .6, 724
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567
Off-Pavement Driving (Off-Road) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
Off-Road Driving (Off-Pavement) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338, 641, 707
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .706
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .642
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .641
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .645
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .645, 707
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .645 Paddle Shifters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643 Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .679
Materials Added To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644 Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
10
740 INDEX
Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
ParkSense System, Rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225, 237
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
Passive Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Personalized Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Placard, Tire And Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .541
Power
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .688
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
Lift Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . .271
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263, 267
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . .187
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Power Seats
Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Recline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .709
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Preparation For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .608
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Programming Transmitters (Remote Keyless Entry) . .23
Quadra-Lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Quadra-Trac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .671
Radio Frequency
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . .17, 20, 29, 33, 44
INDEX 741
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .676
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225, 237
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Rear Wiper/Washer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593
Shifting Into Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . .597
Shifting Out Of Transfer Case Neutral (N) . .488, 600
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652
Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Remote Control
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Disarm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . .20, 26
Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .20, 26
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .416
Remote Starting
Uconnect Customer Programmable Features . . . .366
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
Remote Starting System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .697
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .723
10
742 INDEX
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Retractable Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
Roll Over Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .723
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .712
Seat Belt
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . . . .62
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . . . . . . . . . . .65
Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .686
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Seat Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55, 114
Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . .62
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55, 57, 59
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
INDEX 743
Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146, 147, 153
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147, 149
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Vented . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Ventilated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Security Alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20, 305
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Selec-Terrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .707
SENTRY KEY
Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .719
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .721
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .724
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468, 472
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Signals, Turn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116, 327, 701, 702
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557
Snow Plow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .592
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551, 552, 553, 608
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .707
Speed Control
Accel/Decel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191, 193
Accel/Decel (ACC Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
Speed Control
(Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189, 190, 194
10
744 INDEX
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30, 459
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462, 468
Engine Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Starting And Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
Steering
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186, 187
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186, 187
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .416
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280, 696
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430, 696
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .696
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263, 267
Sun Visor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag . . . . . . . . .71
Suspension, Air. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Sway Control, Trailer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Telescoping Steering Column. . . . . . . . . . . . . .186, 187
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .428
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
Tilt Steering Column. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186, 187
Tire And Loading Information Placard . . . . . . .540, 541
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116, 545, 551, 725
Aging (Life Of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .616
INDEX 745
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552
Flat Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .616
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545, 551
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540, 541
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .560
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .725
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556, 616
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533, 545
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551, 552, 553, 608
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
Wheel Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .616
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585
Tow Hooks, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578, 628
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .628
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome . . . . . . . . . . .593
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .592
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .586
Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589
10
746 INDEX
Trailer Towing Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .677
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .709
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .677
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472, 677
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .709
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .677
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .26
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) . . . . .255
Transmitter Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23, 26
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . .23
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327, 701, 702
Uconnect
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . .366
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
Screen Activated Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25, 366
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Voice Recognition
Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
Do Not Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Siri Eyes Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
Uconnect Access
Vehicle Health Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24, 25
Customer Programmable Features . . . .37, 39, 49, 364
Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . .37, 39, 49, 364
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49, 364
Uconnect Voice Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .725
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567
INDEX 747
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 Wheel And Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .682
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49, 266, 271
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541, 576
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . .20 Windshield Defroster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Vehicle Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430, 696 Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .665
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643, 644
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .657
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .657
Warning, Roll Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .723
Washers, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
Washers, Windshield. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181, 665
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .680
Wheel And Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .682
10
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
2016 Grand Cherokee
STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS®
16WK741-126-AC
©2016 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
2016
OWNER’S MANUAL
Third Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
Grand Cherokee
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising